File Info : application/pdf, 251 Pages, 11.40MB

2015 Owner Manual Hardtop

OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI.

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

MINI

Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en- hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the Vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI
The MINI team of BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/15, 03 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL

We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed MINI Owner's Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.
1. Where the terms "service center," "the service center," "your service center," "service specialist," or "service" are used in the Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a MINI dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with MINI specifications.
2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a "service center" or "your service center," we wanted to clarify that MINI recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a MINI dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with MINI specifications.
While MINI, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops.
3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by MINI, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by MINI. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure

that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.
4. At page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states that you "cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there," the text should read that you "may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there."
5. At page 7, in the "Parts and Accessories" section, the sentence beginning "For your own safety, use ... ," should be disregarded and the following the text should be read in lieu thereof: "The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends using genuine MINI parts and accessories."
In the fifth sentence of that paragraph, the word "cannot" should read "does not."
6. At page 38, in the "Check and replace safety belts" section, the text beginning, "This should only be done by your service center ..." should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: "MINI recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly."
7. At page 135 under the heading: "Objects in the area around the pedals" and at page 219 under the heading: "Carpets and floor mats," the paragraph that begins: "Only use floor mats ..." should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: "The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place."
8. At page 142, under the heading: "Have maintenance carried out," the sentence beginning, "Have the maintenance carried out ..." should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: "MINI recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center."

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Addendum

9. At page 162, under "Bluetooth Hands-Free System," the heading that reads "Approved mobile phones" should read "Recommended mobile phones."
10. At page 176, under the heading "Pressure specifications," the sentence beginning, "Pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes ..." should be disregarded.
11. At page 183, under the heading: "Mounting," the paragraph beginning, "Have mounting and balancing ..." should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: "MINI recommends that you have mounting and balancing performed by your service center or a tire mounting specialist."
12. At page 183, under the heading: "Approved wheels and tires," the term "Approved" should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term "Recommended" should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non-recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle.
13. At page 188, under the heading: "Snow Chains," the paragraph beginning, "Only certain fine-link snow chains ..." should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe

and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center.
14. At page 190, under the heading "Hood," the sentence beginning, "If you are unfamiliar" should be disregarded.
15. At page 194, under the heading: "Engine oil change," the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:
MINI recommends that you have the oil changed at your MINI dealer's service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with MINI specifications.
16. At page 197, under the heading: "Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US Models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian Models," the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your MINI dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with MINI specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle.
17. At page 209, under the "Battery replacement" section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read:
Use of recommended vehicle batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any "check control" messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Addendum

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic- ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 238.
6 Notes
AT A GLANCE 14 Cockpit 18 Radio
CONTROLS 22 Opening and closing 35 Adjusting 43 Transporting children safely 47 Driving 59 Displays 73 Lights 78 Safety 94 Driving stability control systems 98 Driving comfort 112 Climate control 119 Interior equipment 121 Digital compass 127 Storage compartments
DRIVING TIPS 134 Things to remember when driving 137 Loading 141 Saving fuel
ENTERTAINMENT 148 Tone 149 Radio 154 Multimedia
COMMUNICATION 162 Bluetooth hands-free system

MOBILITY 172 Refueling 174 Fuel 176 Wheels and tires 190 Engine compartment 192 Engine oil 195 Coolant 197 Maintenance 199 Replacing components 211 Breakdown assistance 216 Care
REFERENCE 222 Technical data 227 Appendix 231 License Texts and Certifications 238 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic- ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. Marks the end of a specific item of information. "..." Identifies radio display texts used to select individual functions.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle features and op- tions
This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de- scribe and illustrate features that are not avail- able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se- lected optional features or the country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple- mentary Owner's Handbooks.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently from what is shown in the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con- ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan- dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de- scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Notes

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Own safety
Manufacturer The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.
Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require- ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper- ating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo- gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre.
Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a MINI service center or a workshop that works according to the manufacturer's repair proce- dures for the MINI with respectively trained personnel.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories For your own safety, it is recommended that you use genuine parts and accessories ap- proved by MINI. When you purchase accesso-

ries tested and approved by MINI and Genuine MINI Parts, you simultaneously acquire the as- surance that they have been thoroughly tested by MINI to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. MINI warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. MINI will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by MINI. MINI cannot test every product made by other man- ufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other products approved by MINI, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all MINI centers. Installation and operation of non-MINI approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive dam- age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter- fere with the vehicle's electrical system or af- fect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI center for additional informa- tion. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair estab- lishment or individual using any certified auto- motive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo- bile components and parts, including compo- nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi- cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer- tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Notes

chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro- ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re- lated accessories contain lead and lead com- pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol- lowing warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con- ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de- liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or re- gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi- cle to meet different prevailing operating con- ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable war- ranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Cus- tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance meas- ures:
MINI Maintenance system
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War- ranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo- rarily or permanently store technical informa- tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment:
Operating mode of system components, fill levels for instance.
Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rotation speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, trans- verse acceleration.
Malfunctions and faults in important system components, e.g., lights and brakes.
Responses by the vehicle to special situa- tions such as airbag deployment or engag- ing the stability control system.
Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti- mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re- pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor- mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in-

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Notes

cluding the manufacturer, using special diag- nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if you need it. After an error is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations where you can associate these technical data with individuals if combined with other infor- mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness accounts -- possibly with the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer - such as vehicle emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re- corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under- standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.
How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re- corded by the EDR under normal driving condi-

tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac- quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve- hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment. The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Notes
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe- rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe- rcar.gov
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De- fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE CONTROLS DRIVING TIPS ENTERTAINMENT COMMUNICATION MOBILITY REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Power windows31 2 Exterior mirror operation40 3 Central locking system26 4 Lights
Front fog lights76
Parking lights73
Low beams73

Automatic headlight control74 Daytime running lights74 Corner-illuminating lights75 High-beam Assistant75 Instrument lighting76
5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Cruise control on/off, inter- rupt98 Cruise control on/off, inter- rupt104 Store speed98,104
Resume speed100,105
Set speed100,104
Reduce distance104
Increase distance98
6 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal52
High beams, head- light flasher52 High-beam Assistant75
Roadside parking lights73
Computer67
7 Instrument cluster59

Cockpit

AT A GLANCE

8 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers52 Rain sensor53 Cleaning windows54 Rear window wiper54 Cleaning rear window54
9 Steering wheel buttons, right Telephone162 Confirm the selection67 Selection back67 Selection next67 Increase volume Reduce volume
10 Horn 11 Adjust the steering wheel42 12 Unlock hood190

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit

All around the center console

Hazard warning system211

Intelligent Safety86

Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off50
Auto Start/Stop function49

2 Radio149

3 Glove compartment127

4 Climate control112

PDC Park Distance Control106

DSC Dynamic Stability Con- trol94

6 Steptronic transmission selector lever55 Manual transmission selector lever55
7 Parking brake51 8 Driving Dynamics Control96

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Cockpit
All around the roofliner

AT A GLANCE

Emergency Request

Ambient light77

Indicator lamp, front-seat passen- 5

Glass sunroof32

ger airbag80

Reading lights77

Interior lights76

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

Radio

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

Overview

1 Change waveband 2 Volume, on/off 3 Display 4 Opening the main menu 5 Menu level back 6 Selecting menu items
Turn: highlight the menu item in the display or adjust the value.

Press: select the highlighted menu item or store the setting.
7 Open the options for the respective menu. 8 "Telephone": open the menu. 9 Programmable memory buttons 10 "Media": open the menu. 11 "Radio": open the menu. 12 Change the station or track.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Radio

AT A GLANCE

Functions Audio functions and vehicle functions can be operated, adjusted and displayed on the radio. Radio. Multimedia. Telephone. Vehicle settings. Check Control messages.
Menu navigation All functions of the radio can be called up via the main menu. Some menus can also be called up directly via the buttons on the radio.
Selecting menu items Menu items can be selected if they are high- lighted.

Press button.

2. Turn the right-hand knob until the desired menu item is highlighted, e.g.,"Radio".

3. Press the right-hand knob again to confirm the highlighted menu item.

Representation in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Radio".

Symbols in the status field

Audio source

Symbol Meaning
FM, AM Radio waveband.

HD Radio station is being received.

SAT

Satellite radio is switched on.

Satellite radio not available.

Playback via Aux In.

Symbol

Meaning
Playback via USB audio interface. Microphone muted Tone output muted

Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Missed call Wireless network reception strength

Traffic bulletins
Symbol Meaning
TP Traffic bulletins switched on Traffic bulletins switched on, no traffic bulletin stations available. Traffic Jump

Changing settings To set number values or values on a scale:
1. Select the desired menu item. 2. Turn the right-hand knob to set the value. 3. Press the right-hand knob to store the
value.

Example: setting the clock

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Time/Date"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the right-hand knob until the desired hour is set.

6. Press the right-hand knob to store setting.

7. Turn the right-hand knob to set the mi- nutes and press the right-hand knob to save the setting.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE CONTROLS DRIVING TIPS ENTERTAINMENT COMMUNICATION MOBILITY REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Overview
1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlock the tailgate 4 Panic mode

General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con- trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat- tery.
You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver- sion. For Settings, refer to page 29.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 23.
The remote controls hold information on re- quired maintenance. For service data, refer to page 197.

Integrated key
Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar- row 2. The integrated key fits the driver's door lock. Replacing the battery 1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol. 2. Slide the key into the opening and raise the
cover, arrow.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover, arrow.

Interference from radio transmissions through mobile devices in close proximity to remote control.
Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo- bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at- tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.
Starting the engine via emergency detection of the remote control

4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up.
5. Insert lid and cover.
Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.
New remote controls New remote controls are available from the service center.
Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be disabled by your service center.
Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: Interference of radio transmission to re-
mote control by external sources e.g., by radio masts. Empty battery in remote control.

Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the re- mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake. Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote con- trol, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop but- ton within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch.
Personal Profile
The concept Personal Profile provides three profiles, using which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote control has one of these profiles assigned.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con- trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti- vated. All settings stored in the profile are auto- matically applied. If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur- ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control. Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the personal profile.
Adjusting The settings for the following systems and func- tions are saved in the active profile. The scope of storable settings is country- and equipmentdependable. Unlocking and locking. Lights. Radio. Instrument cluster. Climate control. Park Distance Control PDC. Driving Dynamics Control. Cruise control. Intelligent Safety.
Using the remote con- trol
Note
Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in- side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
The vehicle is unlocked. Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti-
vated. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually. The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated. Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 29. The alarm system, refer to page 30, is dis- armed.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re- mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed.
Locking
Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can- not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
The alarm system, refer to page 30, is armed. If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lock the car, this means that the engine or ignition is still switched on. In this case, the engine or ig- nition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Switching on interior lights and courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually. If the button is pressed within 10 seconds of when the vehicle was locked Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft warning system, refer to page 31, are turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- ing the button again.
Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Unlock the tailgate
Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of whether the vehicle was previously locked or unlocked. Depending on the features and the country version, it is also possible to have door un- locked. Create the settings, refer to page 29. If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is locked again as soon as it closes.
Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re- mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.

Provide edge protection
Sharp objects or those with edges can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heat conductors of the rear window. Provide edge protection.
Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol- lowing circumstances:
The battery of the remote control is dis- charged. Replace the battery, refer to page 22.
Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power.
Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.
Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the integrated key, refer to page 26.
For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S.
LX8766E.
LX8CAS.
LX8CAS2.
MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Without remote control

Alarm system The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, un- lock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control.
From the inside
Locking and unlocking

From the outside Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can- not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.
Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, refer to page 22. The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside. To do this, unlock the lid from below with the integrated key, arrow, and remove.

Press button. Vehicle is locked.
Press button. The vehicle is unlocked.
Pressing the buttons for the central locking sys- tem locks and unlocks the doors and the tail- gate when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening Either unlock the doors together using the cen- tral locking system buttons and then pull the door handle above the armrest or pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Tailgate
Hints
Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re- mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.

Opening from the inside With the vehicle is stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell.
Closing

Provide edge protection
Sharp objects or those with edges can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heat conductors of the rear window. Provide edge protection.

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail- gate.

Opening
When the tailgate is opened, make sure there is sufficient clearance to prevent damage.

Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

Press button on the remote control

for approx. 1 second.

As the case may be, the doors are also un- locked. Unlocking with the remote control, refer to page 25.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up- ward.

Comfort Access
The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. Comfort Access supports the following func- tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Convenient closing. Separate unlocking of the tailgate. Start the engine.
Functional requirements There are no sources of interference
nearby. To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started if the re- mote control is in the vehicle.
Unlocking

Convenient closing
Monitor closing Monitor closing to ensure that no one be- comes trapped.

On the driver's or front passenger's door han- dle, press the button, arrow. This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's door han- dle, press the button, arrow. This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: To save battery power, ensure that all power consumers are turned off, before locking the vehicle.

Press and hold down the handle of the driver or the front seat passenger.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.
Unlock the tailgate Press button on tailgate's exterior. This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: The situation of the doors does not change.
Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re- mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.
Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol- lowing circumstances: The battery of the remote control is dis-
charged. Replace the battery, refer to page 22.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power.
Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.
Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 26.

Adjusting

Unlocking The settings are saved in the active profile. Per- sonal Profile, refer to page 23.
Doors

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired function.

"All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

"Driver's door"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un- locks the entire vehicle.

Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired function.

"Tailgate"

Only the tailgate is unlocked.

"Tailgate + door(s)"

The tailgate and the doors are un- locked.

Locking
The settings are saved in the active profile. Per- sonal Profile, refer to page 23.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select desired setting.

"Lock if no door is opened"

The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened.

"Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select desired setting.

"Flash for lock/unlock"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one. "Acoustic warning" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.
Alarm system
The concept When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate. Movements in the vehicle interior Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at-
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the car. Disconnected battery voltage. The alarm system briefly signals tampering: Acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning system. By flashing the daytime running lights.
Arming and disarming the alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac- cess, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. Switch off the alarm, refer to page 31.
Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is armed. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To reel off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror
The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed.
The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se- cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. When the still open access is closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlock- ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.
Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the fol- lowing situations: In automatic car washes. In duplex garages. During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer. With animals in the vehicle.

Power windows
Note Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., cannot operate the power windows and injure them- selves.
On 5-door models

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi- cle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec- onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked again.

On 3-door models

Switching off the alarm
Unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, re- fer to page 23.
With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the remote control on your person, grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely.
Unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed through emer- gency detection of remote control, refer to page 23.

Opening

Press the button to the resistance

point.

The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window opens automatically. Pressing again stops the motion.

See also: Convenient opening, refer to page 24, via remote control.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Closing
Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Pull switch up. The window closes while the reel is held.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to page 28.
Pinch protection system
Danger of jamming even with pinch pro- tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other- wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.
No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the win- dow's range of movement; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes, closing is interrupted. The window reopens slightly.
Closing without the pinch protection system
Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
E. g. danger from the outside or ice might pre- vent window from closing properly - proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. The pinch protection is limited and the win- dow reopens slightly if the closing force ex- ceeds a certain margin.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without jam protection.
On 5-door models: safety switch The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, e.g., from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.
Switching on and off Press button. The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transporting children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without supervi- sion.
Panoramic glass sun- roof
Hints Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; other- wise, injuries may result.
Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., cannot operate the glass sunroof and injure them- selves.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

At a glance

Comfort position
If the glass sunroof stops before it is completely opened, it is in the Comfort position. In this po- sition the wind noises in the interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing the reel.

Closing glass sunroof

Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the reel up to or be- yond the resistance point and re- lease it.
The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

motion.

Press the reel back beyond the resistance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the reel again stops the

With the glass sunroof completely raised
Slide reel back to the resist- ance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is opened as long as the reel is pressed.
Press the reel back beyond the resistance point and re- lease it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the reel again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof open Slide reel forward to the re- sistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed as long as the reel is pressed and stops in the raised posi- tion.
Press the reel forward beyond the resist- ance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position. Pressing the reel toward the back stops the motion.
Press the reel forward beyond the resist- ance point and release it twice. The glass sunroof is closed. Pressing the reel again stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely raised
Press the reel forward beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed.
Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter- rupted. The glass sunroof reopens slightly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Danger of jamming even with pinch pro- tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear; other- wise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.
Closing without the pinch protection system E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist- ance point and hold it.
The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re- sistance point and hold until the glass sun- roof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power failure After a power failure, it can happen that the glass sunroof can only be raised. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recom- mends having this work performed by your service center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Adjusting

would eliminate the protection normally pro- vided by the belt.
Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.
Adjusting seats
Overview

Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 37. Head restraints, refer to page 38. Airbags, refer to page 78.
Seats
Hints Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv-
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle con- trol could lead to an accident.
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This

1 Forward/backward 2 Thigh support 3 Height 4 Backrest tilt Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Adjusting

After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages prop- erly.
Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature.
Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad- justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re- gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

In 3-door models: entering the rear
Hints
Folding back and locking the backrest Before driving off, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.
Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Fold down seat back 1. Pull lever up to the stop.

If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automat- ically with the temperature selected last. When Green mode, refer to page 142, is acti- vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switch off Press button longer. The LEDs go out.

2. Fold backrest forward. 3. Push the seat forward. Original position The driver's seat features a mechanical mem- ory function for forward/back and backrest ad- justment. 1. Push the seat back into the original posi-
tion. 2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position, the seat latches in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 35. Front seat heating
Switching on Press button once for each tempera- ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

Safety belts
Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four or five seating positions, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Number of safety belts Your vehicle has been fitted with four or five safety belts for your and your passengers' safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it.
If needed, disengage the belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on the left and right.
The center rear safety belt buckle is solely in- tended for the center passenger.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Adjusting

Hints One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.
Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in- jure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable ob- jects, or be pinched.
What reduces the restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect is reduced.
Using the middle safety belt If the middle safety belt in the rear is used, the larger side of the backrest must be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha-
nism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig- nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the front passen- ger seat.
Damage to safety belts Wear and tear after accidents or when dam- aged otherwise: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.
Check and replace safety belts This should only be done by your service center; otherwise, this safety feature might not work properly.
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjust the headrest via the backrest tilt as needed.
Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.
Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.
Adjusting the height

Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans- porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro- tective function of the head restraint is unavail- able.
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

To raise: pull. To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.
Adjusting the height

1. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re- straint out completely.
To remove the headrest, fold the backrest rear- ward if it is in the upright position.

To raise: push. To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Folding down head restraints Extending/retracting head restraint Only fold down head restraint if no pas-
sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted headrests again if passengers are being carried

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Adjusting

in the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Mirrors
Exterior mirrors

To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint.
Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Fold the seat down, refer to page 125, before removing the head restraint, otherwise the head restraint cannot be removed.

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir- ror setting is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re- mote control, the position is automatically re- trieved if this function is active.
Note
Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.
Overview

1. Pull head restraint up against the resist- ance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re- straint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans- porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro- tective function of the head restraint is unavail- able.

1 Adjusting41 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out41
Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of mirror.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

Activating

Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.
Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim- med. Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror, refer to page 42.
Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever

Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position.

Fold in and out
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. E. g. this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto- matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear view mirror, flip the lever forward.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Adjusting

Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror. Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature The concept

Steering wheel
Note Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.
Adjusting

Photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Fold the lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi- tion.
4. Fold the lever back.
5. Switch off the ignition again if needed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

The right place for children

Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them- selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.
Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re- straint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 80.

Note
Deactivating the front-seat passenger air- bags If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas- senger airbags; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are activated, even with a child restraint system.
Installing child re- straint systems
Hints
Manufacturer's information for child re- straint systems To select, mount and use child restraint sys- tems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the protective effect can be lost.
Ensuring the stability of the child seat When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas- tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad- justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

there is an increased risk of injury because of unexpected movement of the seat backrest.
In order to faciliate the installation of a backfacing child restraint system in the rear:
move the front passenger's seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

move the passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.
Child seat security

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au- tomatically, refer to page 80.
Deactivating the front-seat passenger air- bags
If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas- senger airbags; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are activated, even with a child restraint system.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo- cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt. 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraint system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Note Follow manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint sys- tems, observe the operating and safety infor-

mation from the system manufacturer; other- wise, the level of protection may be reduced.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

and CRS weight of 65 lb when the child is re- strained by the internal harnesses.
Properly engage the lower LATCH an- chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection may be re- duced.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint sys- tem, pull the belt away from the child restraint system.
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym- bols. It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt in- stead for the middle seat.

Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an- chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not passed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is not twisted up to the upper mounting points; otherwise, the belt cannot properly secure the child restraint system in an accident.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to
the user's manual of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop-
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap
Note
Mounting eyelets Use the mounting eyes only for the upper retaining strap to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be dam- aged.

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eye 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise the head restraint if needed. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye on the rear seat. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

No persons on the back seat when there is a child restraint system with an upper retaining strap on the front passenger seat.
When there is a child restraint system with an upper retaining strap on the front passenger seat, no one should sit in the back seat directly behind it, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury due to the upper retaining strap.
Upper retaining strap when the backrest is folded down
When the backrest is folded down, do not guide the belt through the head restraint sup- ports on the backrest; otherwise the belt may not secure the child restraint system properly in case of an accident

This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 32.

ON 5-door models: Lock- ing the doors and win- dows
Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear

rear.

Press button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving

CONTROLS

Driving

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Steptronic transmission: the en- gine starts in selector lever posi- tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop but- ton is pressed.
Ignition on Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but- ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but- ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.
To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
During locking, also with the low beams ac- tivated.
Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are turned off.
When opening and closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are turned off.
While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights af- ter approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state Activate radio-ready state:
When the engine is running: press the Start/ Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re- main ready for operation.
Radio ready state switches off automatically:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving

After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system. Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be started. The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., the ignition is automatically switched off for the fol- lowing reasons: Opening or closing the driver's door. Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights. If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, the day- time running lights are activated.
Starting the engine
Hints
Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.
Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run- ning, set the parking brake and place the trans- mission in selector lever position P or N to pre- vent the vehicle from moving.
Repeated starting in quick succession Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat- edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned,

posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds.
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage selector lever position P or N. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a cer- tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu-
tral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a cer- tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Engine stop
Hints Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., cannot start the engine.
Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed. Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth- erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve-

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving

CONTROLS

hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.
Before driving into a car wash So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob- serve instructions for going into an automatic car wash, refer to page 216.
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine 1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on. 3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off.

the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail- able when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions: Manual transmission: Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed. The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed. Steptronic transmission: The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D. Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped. The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed. In order to be able to release the brake pedal, engage lever in position P. The engine remains off. To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au- tomatically. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en- gine stop have not been met.

Automatic operation
After every start of the engine using the Start/ Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in the last selected state, refer to page 50. When

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving

Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: External temperature too low. The external temperature is high and auto-
matic climate control is running. The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level. The engine is not yet at operating tempera-
ture. The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned. After driving in reverse. Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The vehicle battery charge is very low. At higher elevations. The engine compartment lid is unlocked. The parking assistant is activated. Stop-and-go traffic. Selector lever in selector lever position R, N
or M/S.
Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol- lowing conditions: Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed. Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open. The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/ Stop button.
Functional limitations Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti- vated engine starts up automatically in the fol- lowing situations: Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on. The steering wheel is turned. Steptronic transmission: change from selec-
tor lever position D to R, N or M/S. Steptronic transmission: change from selec-
tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S. The vehicle begins rolling. Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The vehicle battery charge is very low. Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on. Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.
Switching the system on/off
Using the button
Press button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving

CONTROLS

LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.
LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e. g., when leaving it.
1. Steptronic transmission: engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
3. Manual transmission: shift into first gear or reverse.
4. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons as if the driver were absent.
Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.
Hints Use while driving On rare occasions if it is necessary to use
the parking brake while driving, do not use ex- cessive force when applying it. When using it, keep the button on the lever depressed. Otherwise, using excessive force when applying the parking brake may cause the rear wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing. To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac- tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set.

Parking brake
Applying The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving

Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals

High beams, headlight flasher

High beams, arrow 1. Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated. Set via radio.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Triple turn signal"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe
Hints
Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind- shield Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the wiper motor may be damaged.
Do not activate wipers on dry windshield Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.
Do not activate wipers with wipers folded away Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be damaged.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving

CONTROLS

Switching on
Push wiper lever up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po- sition when released. Normal wiper speed: push up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. Wipers change to normal speed when vehi- cle comes to standstill. Switch off and brief wipe

Interval mode or rain sensor The concept Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset. The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind- shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir- ror. Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever. The LED in the wiper lever lights up and wiping starts. When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un- intentional wiping can cause damages.

Push wiper lever down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po- sition when released.
Single wipe: press down once.
To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving

Washing the windshield
Pull the wiper lever towards you. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind- shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze onto the windshield which might impede your viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; operation might damage pump. Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati- cally heated while the ignition is switched on. Rear window wiper Switching on the rear window wiper

Cleaning rear window In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar- row 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle posi- tion when released.
Fold-out position of the wipers Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un- der frosty conditions, e.g.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec- onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.
Folding wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are activated.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid

Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward, ar- row 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en- gaged, the system switches to continuous op- eration.

Hints
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause in- jury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from possible sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving

CONTROLS

Follow the notes and instructions on the con- tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con- tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concen- trate or the equivalent.
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.
Washer fluid reservoir

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Manual transmission
Shifting Shifting into 5th or 6th gear When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad- vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.
Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the selector lever dynamically to the left and engage the re- verse gear.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser- voir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con- centrate and tap water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac- turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the right mixture.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif- ferent manufacturers because they can clog the windshield washer nozzles.

D Drive Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper- ation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.
R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral: The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car washes, e.g.
P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se- lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve- hicle may begin to move.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be- yond the resistance point at the full throttle po- sition.
Engaging a selector lever position Press on the brake pedal until you start driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. The selector lever can only be taken out of se- lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running. With the vehicle is stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise, the selector lever is blocked: shift lock. A lock prevents inadvertent shifting into selec- tor lever position P or R.
Canceling the lock
Press button on the front of the selector lever, arrow.

Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec- tor lever position D. The engaged selector lever position, such as S1, is displayed in the instrument cluster. The sport program of the transmission is acti- vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se-
lector lever position D. 2. Push the selector lever forward or back-
ward. Manual mode becomes active and the selector lever position is changed. The engaged selector lever position is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1. Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode To shift down: press the selector lever for-
ward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving

CONTROLS

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in- strument cluster, followed by the currently se- lected gear.
Manual mode M/S: prevent automatic upshifting Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed. For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if one of the following conditions is met: DSC is deactivated. TRACTION is activated. In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simul- taneously operating the kickdown and the left shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro- duced via the shift paddles when switching briefly from D to manual mode.
Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in- strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode.
If the selector lever is still in selector lever posi- tion D with the respective transmission version, it is possible to switch back into the automatic mode:
Pull and hold right shift paddle.
Or
In addition to the briefly pulled right shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
In the manual mode, after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis- played, e.g.: P.

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.
Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.

Manually release the transmission lock
Should the selector lever be blocked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being turned on, the brake being depressed and the unlock button being pressed, the transmission lock can be manually canceled:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving

Before unlocking the transmission lock man- ually, engage the parking brake forcefully to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
1. Loosen the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever. Un- plug the cable connector if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve- hicle tool kit, refer to page 199, press the yellow release lever downward, arrow.

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode, re- fer to page 94.
Requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.

Start with launch control While the engine is running:

4. Move the selector lever slightly toward the rear; to do this press the unlock button on the front of the selector lever. Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po- sition.
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control
The concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction.
Hints
Component wear Do not use Launch Control too often; oth- erwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 134, period. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Press button and select SPORT with

Driving Dynamics Control, refer to

page 96.

The instrument cluster displays TRACTION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.

4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the trans- mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Displays

CONTROLS

Displays

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster

1 Tachometer64 2 Messages, e.g. Check Control 3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge64 5 Display/reset miles64 6 Electronic displays60

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS Electronic displays

Displays

1 Driver assistance systems Messages, e.g. Check Control Time64 External temperature64 Selection lists67 Total miles/trip odometer64

On-board computer67 2 Selector lever position display55
Gear shift indicator65 3 Driving Dynamics Control96
Status

Check Control
The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a com- bination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the radio.

Indicator/warning lights
General information The indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buck- led. The safety belt reminder can also

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Displays

CONTROLS

be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.
Airbag system Airbag system and belt tensioner are defective. Have the vehicle checked by the service
center immediately.
Parking brake, brake system The parking brake is set. For additional information, refer to Re- lease parking brake, refer to page 51.

Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead. For more information, see Camerabased cruise control, ACC, refer to page 98.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de- tected. Flashing: the conditions are not ade- quate for operating the system. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending dan- ger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Increase distance. Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan- ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed. Intervention by braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Pedestrian warning
If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak- ing force boost in some cases defective. Stop carefully. Take into account longer brake travel. Have this checked by the service center immediately.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and adapt driving profile to the driving circumstances. Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system checked by the service center. For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC, refer to page 94.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Displays

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched off or Dynamic Traction Con- trol DTC is switched on.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 94, and Dy- namic Traction Control, refer to page 95.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
For additional information, refer to Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 84.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected.
Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav- ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
TPM could not conclude the reset: perform the reset of the system again.
A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if needed.
Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.
For additional information, refer to Tire Pres- sure Monitor, refer to page 81.

Steering system
Steering system in some cases defec- tive. Have the steering system checked by the service center.
Engine functions
Illuminated: vehicle generates in- creased exhaust emissions. It is possible to continue driving. Exhaust system in some cases defective. Flashing: increased engine load damages the catalytic converter. Continue driving with a lower engine load. Possible engine problem. Have the vehicle checked by the service center. For additional information, refer to On-board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 198.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal on. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. For additional information, refer to Turn signal, refer to page 52.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti- vated. For additional information, refer to Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re- fer to page 73.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated. For additional information, refer to Front fog lights, refer to page 76.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Displays

CONTROLS

High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto- matically as a function of the traffic sit- uation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam Assistant, refer to page 75.

Hiding Check Control messages

Cruise control The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams High beams are activated. For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page 52.
General lamps At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored. The symbol is shown in the display of the instrument
cluster.

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are dis- played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev- eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes- sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis- played again automatically.
Other Check Control messages are faded automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control messages

Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the radio display.
To view the entire text line for line: turn the right-hand knob on the radio.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Check Control"

5. Selecting the desired Check Control mes- sage

Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Displays

Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary. The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Notes on refueling, refer to page 172.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 , roads might be icy.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk of an accident.

Time

The time is displayed in the in- strument cluster.
Setting the time on the radio, re- fer to page 69.

Odometer and trip odom- eter
The concept Odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Resetting the trip odometer
Press the knob. The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched off. When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is re- set.

External temperature

on roads.

If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 , a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis- played.
There is an increased risk of ice

Date

The date is displayed in the in- strument cluster.
Set the date on the radio, refer to page 69.

Range
Display
With a low remaining range: A Check Control message is
displayed briefly. The remaining range is
shown on the computer. With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking
curves aggressively - engine operation might vary.
The Check Control message appears continu- ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Displays

CONTROLS

Displaying the cruising range

Symbols

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Instrument cluster display"

4. "Range"

Current fuel consump- tion
The concept Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Service requirements
The concept After the ignition is turned on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance. Your service specialist can read the current service requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service requirements The radio will display detailed information about service requirements.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Service required"

5. Select the desired entry to view detailed in- formation.

Symbols

Description
No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally man- dated inspection is approach- ing.
The service deadline has al- ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Service required"

5. "§ Vehicle inspection" or"§ Emission inspection"

6. "Change date"

7. Enter the desired appointment.

Gear shift indicator
The concept The system recommends the most fuel efficient gear for the current driving situation.
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun- try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica- tor is active in the manual mode of the Step- tronic transmission and with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis- played in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Displays

Manual transmission: displaying

Example

Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Steptronic transmission: Displaying

Example

Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system assists the driver and does not re- place the human eye.
At a glance
Camera

Speed limit detection
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable over- head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and will be dis- played depending on the situation.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub- ject to limitations imposed by technology. Speed limits with extra text characters are al- ways displayed.

The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in- terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Instrument cluster display"

4. "Speed limit information"

If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instrument cluster via the computer.

Display
The following is displayed in the instrument cluster:

Hints
Speed limits when towing a trailer are not shown.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Displays

CONTROLS

Speed limit detection
The last speed limit detected.
Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out af- ter curves or longer stretches of roadway.
Without navigation system: speed limit detection switched on but no speed limit or cancel- lation is detected.

It also displays programs of the Driving Dynam- ics Control.
Display

System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol- lowing situations:
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
When signs are concealed by objects.
When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
When driving toward bright lights.
When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered by a sticker, etc.
In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.
When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
During calibration of the camera immedi- ately after vehicle shipment.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button the steering wheel

Function
Activate the respec- tive list and select the desired settings.

On-board computer
Calling up information on the info display

Selection lists in the in- strument cluster
The concept With the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster the following can be displayed or operated: Current audio source.

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the info display of the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Displays

Calling up information in the radio Information is also shown on the radio display.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Onboard info"

Resetting values 1. Select the desired value. 2. "Reset?"

Information at a glance

Info display
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the info display: Range. GREEN Info. When GREEN Mode is activated. Average fuel consumption. Current fuel consumption. Average speed. Date. Engine temperature display. Speed limit detection. Speed.

Radio Selected information is shown on the radio. Range. Average fuel consumption. Average speed.

Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the com- puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Instrument cluster display"

4. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info Description of GREEN info, refer to page 143.

Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period while the en- gine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the on-board comupter.

Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values
Press and hold the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and motor oil tem- perature. As soon as the optimum operating temperature has been attained, the indicator is in the center position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Displays

CONTROLS

If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, be- come too hot, a Check Control message is dis- played. Check the coolant level, refer to page 195.
Speed limit detection Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 66, function.

Speed warning

The concept
Displays speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Speed"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the right knob until the desired limit is displayed.

6. Press the right button.

The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Speed"

4. "Warning"

Setting your current speed as the limit

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Speed"
4. "Select current speed"
The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.

Settings on the radio
The following settings are created on the radio: Time, date. Formats, units of measure.

Formats and units of measure

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Language/Units"

4. Select the desired format or unit of meas- ure:

"Language:"

"Consumption:"

"Distance:"

"Pressure:"

"Temperature:"

5. Set the desired unit of measure or lan- guage.

Setting the time and date

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Time/Date"

4. Select desired menu entry:

"Time:"

"Time format:"

"Date:"

"Date format:"

5. Turn the right knob until the desired setting is selected.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Displays

LED ring on the central instrument cluster
The concept The LED ring displays light animations to repre- sent specific functions.
Basic displays Basic functions, for example the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if so de- sired.
Event displays Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for example the volume or temperature set- tings, can be set as event displays. Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corre- sponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.
Example: tachometer Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respec- tive RPM warning margins.
Display

Switching on/off LED ring

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Center Instrument"

4. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Center Instrument"

4. "Basic display" or "Event display"

5. Select desired setting.

Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Center Instrument"

4. "Brightness"

5. Turn the right-hand knob.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Arrow 1: current RPM. Arrow 2: prewarning field. Arrow 3: warning field.

Chrono package in the cockpit
The concept
The Chrono package consists of three display instruments in the cockpit, where the engine oil pressure, the turbocharger boost, and the time are displayed. In addition, intermediate and to- tal times can be measured using the stop watch.
The display elements of the Chrono package mainly support a sporty driving style, e,g, on racetracks.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Displays

CONTROLS

Overview
1 Engine oil pressure display 2 Turbocharger boost display 3 Time/stop watch
Engine oil pressure The current engine oil pressure is displayed. Turbocharger boost The current boost of the turbocharger is dis- played. Stop watch General information The stop watch contains the following features: Measuring the total time. Measuring and storing of up to nine lap
times. Displaying the time.
The red indicator light indicates that the stop watch is active. Overview, buttons

MODE button, arrow 1. START/STOP button, arrow 2. RESET/LAP buttons, arrow 3.
Displaying the measured times The times measured using the stop watch are shown in minutes and seconds on the display. For times greater than 60 minutes, the num- bers of hours and the minutes with seconds are alternatively displayed. If the stop watch is running, the seconds are also shown using a seconds pointer in the scale of the display element.
Measuring the total time 1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop
watch. 2. Press button, arrow 2, again to stop the
stop watch.
Lap times
General information It is possible to measure and store up to nine lap times. Older lap times are overwritten.
Measuring and storing a lap time 1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop
watch. 2. Press button, arrow 3, to measure and store
a lap time. The lap time is briefly shown in the display and via the seconds pointer of the stop watch, e.g., LAP 1 with the measured time. The stop watch continues running in the background. 3. If needed, press button, arrow 3, again to measure a further lap time.
Calling up lap times 1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until
LAP 1 is shown on the display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Displays

2. Press button, arrow 2, to call up the individ- ual lap times.
Deleting lap times 1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until
LAP 1 is shown on the display. 2. Press button, arrow 3, to delete all stored
lap times.
Displaying the time The time is copied from the instrument cluster. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until the time is displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Lights

CONTROLS

Lights

Parking lights, corner- ing lights and roadside parking lights

General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati- cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lights

Position of switch

: the vehicle's lights

light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.

Do not use the parking lights for extended peri- ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis- charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

When parking you better turn on just the roadside parking light.

1 Rear fog lights
2 Front fog lights
3 Depending on the equipment: automatic headlight control, cornering lights, Highbeam Assistant, welcome lights, daytime running lights
4 Lights off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lights / daytime running lights
6 Depending on the equipment: low beams, welcome lights, High-beam Assistant
7 Instrument lighting

Low beams Position of switch with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up. Roadside parking lights
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Lights

Switching on With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switch off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and headlight courtesy de- lay feature
Welcome lights When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in position or : parking and interior lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked depending on the ambient brightness.
Activating/deactivating Set via radio.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Welcome light"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Headlight courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the radio-ready state is switched off if the lights are turned off and the headlight flasher is switched on.

Setting the duration Set via radio.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Lighting" 4. "Pathway lighting:" 5. Set length of time. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.
Automatic headlight control
Position of switch : the low beams are acti- vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams always stay on when the fog lights are activated.
Personal responsibility The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg- ment in determining when to turn the lights on in response to ambient lighting conditions. E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.

Daytime running lights

With the ignition switched on, the daytime run-

ning lights light up in position ,

. After the ignition is switched off, the park-

ing lights light up in position

Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti- vate the daytime running lights.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Lights

CONTROLS

Set via radio.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Daytime running lamps"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

manually reel off the high beams in situations where required to avoid a safety risk.
Activating

Cornering lamp
Position of switch : going around corners, the cornering lamp also lights the interior area of the curve. Below a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h when the flasher is switched on and the steering angle is detected, there is automatic activation.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Cornering light is disrupted or failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept When the low beams are activated, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a camera on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as- sistant ensures that the high beams are acti- vated whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Note
Personal responsibility The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore,

The High-beam Assistant can be activated when the low beams are activated. 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or . 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, arrow.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the low beams are on, the lights are au- tomatically brightened or dimmed. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. The blue indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.
Switching the high beams on and off manually
High beams on, arrow 1.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Lights

High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti- vate the High-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation. When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on freeways. In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. At low speeds. When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered with stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 74, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Rear fog lights The low beams or front fog lights must be switched on.
Press button. The yellow indicator lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 74, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the rear fog lights.

Instrument lighting

Adjusting

The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights
General information The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights and courtesy lights are controlled automati- cally. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con- trols brightness of some of these features.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Lights

CONTROLS

Overview
1 Interior lights 2 Reading lamp 3 Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on and off Press button.
To reel off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button. Reading lights
Press button.
Reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light. Ambient light Depending on your optional features lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the interior. Changing color
Push the switch forward or back: manual color change. Push and hold the switch forward or back: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness
Via the thumb wheel you may adjust the brightness of the ambient light for the instru- ment lighting or radio.
Set via radio.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Brightness"

5. Set the desired brightness.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Safety

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger 3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbags

Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide ad- equate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Safety

CONTROLS

Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa- tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.
Information on how to ensure the opti- mal protective effect of the airbags
Keep at a distance from the airbags.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.
There should be no person, animals, or ob- jects between an airbag and a person.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not at- tach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS devices or' mobile phones.
Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries might occur when front airbag is activated.
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.
Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries might occur when airbag is activated.
Do not remove the airbag system.
Do not remove the steering wheel.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the air- bag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.
Never modify either the individual compo- nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the roofliner.
Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear- ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Malfunction, deactivation and after de- ploying the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme- diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, you may risk burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis- mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or an authorized repair shop for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys- tem could lead to failure in an emergency or unintentional activation of the airbag - both may lead to injury.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag system
When the ignition is reel on, the warn- ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op- erational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on.
The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Safety

In case of a malfunction have airbag sys- tem checked immediately.
In case of a malfunction have airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in case of a severe accident.
Automatic deactivation of the frontseat passenger airbags The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's re- sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas- senger's side are either activated or deacti- vated.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, proper functioning of the front passenger airbag might not be assured.
Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen- ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc- tions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.
Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac- tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat un- less they are specifically recommended by your vehicle's manufacturer.
Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei- ther activated or deactivated.
The indicator lamp lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint fix- ing system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.
The indicator lamp does not light up when, e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, particularly in child seats required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Safety

CONTROLS

After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger air- bags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front-seat passen- ger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front passenger's airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passeng- er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con- trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep the accuracy of this function over the long-term.
Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Con- trol Display.
1. Move the respective seat all the way for- ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re- peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re- peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
Hints
Tire damage due to external factors Sudden tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in ad- vance.
With use of the system observe further infor- mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re- fer to page 176.
Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the cor- rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable signaling of tire pressure loss is not assured. Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en- sure that the system will operate properly.
Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

The status is displayed.

In addition, the current tire inflation pressures are displayed. It shows the actual values read;

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Safety

they may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Carry out reset Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.
1. Start the engine - do not drive off.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

4. "Vehicle status"

5. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

6. To reset the tire pressure: "Perform reset"

7. Drive away.

"Resetting..." is displayed.

After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driv- ing.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
A reset of the system was not carried out after a wheel was changed. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire pressures before the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 184, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys- tem, refer to page 185, can be used for this purpose. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System, refer to page 185. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Safety

CONTROLS

3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a re- set. Then perform the reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv- ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during brak- ing, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma- neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or longer de- pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re- duced when braking, braking distances are lon- ger and the self-steering properties will change.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving and contact your service center.

Required inflation pressure check message
A Check Control message is displayed in the fol- lowing situations
The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.
Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last confirmation.
In this case:
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
Carry out a reset of the system after a tire change.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re- ported though tire inflation pressures are cor- rect.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus in- creasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire in- flation pressure is reduced when the tire tem- perature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
A wheel without TPM electronics, such as an emergency wheel, is mounted: have the service center check it if needed.
Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Safety

TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re- set the system again.
Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav- ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in- flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi- cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un- der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in- flation has not reached the level to trigger illu- mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain continu- ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in- tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va- riety of reasons, including the installation of re- placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re- placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept The system does not measure the actual infla- tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a tire inflation pressure loss by com- paring the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. This will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other- wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as- sured. Initialize the system after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.
Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, e.g., whether the RPA is active.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

The status is displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Safety

CONTROLS

Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire pres- sures serve as reference values in order to de- tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con- firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

5. Start the engine - do not drive off.

6. Start the initialization with "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM) reset".

7. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 184, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta- bility Control is switched on if needed.
System limits
Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface. Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys- tem, refer to page 185, can be used for this purpose. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System, refer to page 185.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Safety

Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv- ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during brak- ing, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma- neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or longer de- pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re- duced when braking, braking distances are lon- ger and the self-steering properties will change.
Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving and contact your service center.
Intelligent Safety
The concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system. The intelligent safety systems can hel prevent an imminent collision. Front-end collision warning with City Brak-
ing function, refer to page 87. Pedestrian warning with city braking func-
tion, refer to page 90
Hints
Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi- cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci- dents are still possible despite all warnings.
Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Safety

CONTROLS

Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or im- properly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.
Tow-starting and towing For towing the vehicle turn, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc- tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated. The LED lights up green.
Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off. The LED goes out.
Front-end collision warning with City Brak- ing function

Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati- cally active after every departure. Some Intelli- gent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.
Press button briefly: The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac- cording to their respective settings. LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

The concept
The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an ac- cident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi- nent collision and actuates brakes independ- ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror.
The front-end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS Detection range

Safety

At a glance Button in the vehicle

It responds to objects if they are detected by the system.
Hints
Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi- cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci- dents are still possible despite all warnings.
Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or im- properly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.
Tow-starting and towing For towing the vehicle turn, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc- tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.

Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in- terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving-off. Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly: The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac- cording to their respective settings.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Safety

CONTROLS

LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated. The LED lights up green.
Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off. The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time The warning time can be set on the radio.
1. Intelligent Safety button The intelligent safety menu is displayed for a brief time on the radio display.
2. "Front. Coll. Warn." 3. "Warning time" 4. Setting the desired warning time The selected warning time is stored for the pro- file currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an acous- tic signal sounds: acute warning. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu- ver.

Prewarning This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter- vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous prewarning.
Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step- ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter- vention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric- tions are to be considered.
System limits
Detection range The system's detection potential is limited.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Safety

Thus a warning might not be issued or be is- sued late. E. g. the following situations may not be de- tected: Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow-
fall. In tight curves. If the camera viewing field or the front
windshield are dirty or covered. If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine, via the Start/Stop knob. During calibration of the camera immedi-
ately after vehicle shipment. If there is constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an excess of false warnings.
Pedestrian warning with city braking function

The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col- lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. A camera at the base of the rearview mirror controls the system.
General information In daylight the system warns of possible colli- sions with pedestrians at speeds from about 6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h shortly before a collision the system supports you with a braking intervention. Under those circumstances it reacts to people who are within the detection range of the sys- tem.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div- ided into two areas. Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle. Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo- cated within the central area. A warning is is- sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

The concept
The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe- destrians.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Safety

CONTROLS

Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi- cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci- dents are still possible despite all warnings.

Camera

Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or im- properly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.
Tow-starting and towing For towing the vehicle turn, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc- tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in- terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly: The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac- cording to their respective settings. LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Press button again:
All Intelligent Safety systems are activated.
The LED lights up green.

Intelligent Safety button

Hold down button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off.
The LED goes out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Safety

Warning with braking function
Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step- ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter- vention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric- tions are to be considered.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
Pedestrians outside of the detection range. Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow-
fall. In tight curves. If the camera viewing field or the front
windshield are dirty or covered. If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine, via the Start/Stop knob. During calibration of the camera immedi-
ately after vehicle shipment. If there is constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky. When it is dark outside.
Brake force display
The concept

System limits

Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim- ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is- sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de- tected:
Partially covered pedestrians.

During normal brake application, the brake lights light up.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

During heavy brake application, the flash- ers light up in addition.

Safety

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle contains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en- gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis- tance to a minimum during emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle conditions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re- duced during acceleration and when driving in curves. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon- ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in- strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC Press button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de- activated.
Automatic activation When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations: The vehicle has a flat tire. When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some- what limited driving stability. Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. Therefore drive with appropriate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.

When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds.
When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Activating DTC Press button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC Press button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle. To increase maneuverability, with a corre- spondingly sporty driving style, wheels are braked individually.
Dynamic Damping Con- trol
The concept The tuning of the suspension can be changed with the system.
Programs The system offers several different programs. Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 96.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

MID/GREEN Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more comfort.
SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb- ers for greater driving agility.

Driving Dynamics Con- trol

The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to finetune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose between three different programs. Driving Dy- namics Control will activate the particular pro- gram.

Operating the programs
Driving Dynamics Control

Program
MID GREEN SPORT

MID For balanced tuning. With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN GREEN, refer to page 142, provides consistent tuning to maximize range.
Activating GREEN Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate GREEN. 2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Configure the program.

Via radio

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Configure the program.

For vehicles without a configurable SPORT pro- gram:

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "GREEN Mode"

4. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the engine control for greater driving agility.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of the suspension also changes and SPORT can be individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the profile cur- rently in use.

Activating SPORT
Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the left until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT Depending on your vehicle's optional features, SPORT can be individually configured.
Activating SPORT.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Select "Driving mode". Configure the program. Set via radio.

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Driving mode"

4. "Configure SPORT"

5. Make the desired settings.

This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated.

Displays

Program selection
With Driving Dynamics Control turned on a list of programs is displayed and can be selected.

Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv- ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll back.

Selected program
The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving off on inclines. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with- out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
For vehicles with respective equipment ver- sions, the possible holding duration amounts to 2 minutes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
Camera-based cruise con- trol, ACC
The concept Use this system to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati- cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you.
A camera on the interior rear view mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au- tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster.
As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle acceler- ates to the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained uphill if engine power is in- sufficient.

General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the set drive mode, refer to page 96, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.
Hints
Personal responsibility
Even an active system holds the driver re- sponsible for his or her driving, particularly for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed, keeping your distance and for your driving style all in relation to traffic.
Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations.
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed, e.g. through braking, steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of accident.
Unfavorable weather conditions
In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, for instance if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of traffic situations as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already detected. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press button Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt, re- fer to page 99
Store/maintain speed, refer to page 100
Resume speed, refer to page 100
Reduce distance, refer to page 100
Increase distance, refer to page 100
Increase, maintain, and store speed, refer to page 100
Reduce, maintain, and store speed, refer to page 100

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control
Switching on Press button on the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster lights up.
Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as de- sired speed and displayed with symbol.
Cruise control can be used.
Switch off Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system
use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.
Press button on the steering wheel.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser- ies, optional features and country specifica- tions.
Camera

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting Press button on the steering wheel.

The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in- terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

The system is automatically interrupted if:
The brakes are applied.
The clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec- onds or released while a gear is not en- gaged.
Selector lever position N is set.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.
DSC is actively controlling stability.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

The detection range of the camera is im- paired, e.g., by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun.
The vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed
Hints
Adjusting the desired speed Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.
Differences in speed Large differences in speed relative to other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system such as in the following situations: When fast approaching a slowly moving ve- hicle. When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button. Or:
Press or button in the interrupted state. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.
The speed is displayed on the symbol. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed.

Changing the speed

or is set.

button: press until the desired speed

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. or button: each time it is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi- mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. or button: hold down to repeat the cor- responding action.
Distance Select a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf-
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.
Reduce distance Press button repeatedly until the de- sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.
Increase distance Press button repeatedly until the de- sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and distance
While driving Press button with the system inter- rupted. Desired speed and distance
are then continued with these settings. The se-

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

lected distance is briefly displayed in the info display.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off. When the ignition is switched off.
Changing between cruise control with/ without distance control
Traffic ahead The cruise control does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. Take this factor into account you yourself must react; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.
To reel over to cruise control:
Press and hold this button, or

Brief status display Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements are currently not ready for opera- tions.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you Selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por- tion of the info display.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2

Press and hold this button.

Distance 3

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and check-control message is displayed as soon as the reel is made to cruise control.
To reel back to the camera-based cruise con- trol, press one of the buttons.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
In addition to the indicator lamp, the desired speed is displayed in the central information display. The indicator lights up green: the system is active. The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted. No display: system is switched off.

Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on.
Indicator/warning lights
Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lights do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

101

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Detection range

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak- ing or make an evasive maneuver.

The system has been interrupted or dis- tance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup- pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was de- tected.
Changing between cruise control with/ without distance control Display in the instrument cluster:
Cruise Control without distance control.
Camera-based cruise control with dis- tance control.
System limits
Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The system is functional at speeds be- ginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h. Comply with the legal speed limit and safety distance in every situation when using the sys- tem.

The detection lidacity of the system and the au- tomatic braking lidacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection potential Because the camera detection system's potential is limited, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if needed; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci- dent.
Deceleration The system does not decelerate for: Pedestrians, cyclists or similar slow road
users. Red traffic lights. Cross traffic. Oncoming traffic. Unlit vehicles or vehicles with defective
lighting at night.

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Swerving vehicles

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

In tight curves the system offers only restricted detection where a vehicle ahead of you might be detected late or not at all.

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis- tance. This also applies to major speed differ- ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve- hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu- vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other- wise, there is the risk of an accident.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can- not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the gas pedal the system is reac- tivated and controls speed independently.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the sys- tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
When an object was not correctly detected.
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow- fall.
In tight curves.
If the camera viewing field or the front windshield are dirty or covered.
When driving toward bright lights.
Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en- gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
During calibration of the camera immedi- ately after vehicle shipment.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

103

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Cruise control
The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en- gine braking is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable con- ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, e.g.: On winding roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
General information The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Depending on the set drive mode, refer to page 96, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.
Controls
Overview
Press button Function
System on/off, interrupt
Store speed
Resume speed

Press button Function
Increasing, maintaining or storing the speed
Reducing, maintaining or storing the speed
Switching on Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The current speed is adopted as the de- sired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control can be used.
Switch off Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system
use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.
Press button.
If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if: The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec-
onds or released while a gear is not en- gaged. The gear engaged is too high for the cur- rent speed.

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Selector lever position N is set. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed
Hints
Adjusting the desired speed Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Or or button: press while the system is in-
terrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. This is displayed in the instrument cluster. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed.
Changing the speed or button: press repeatedly until the de-
sired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. or button: each time it is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi- mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

The maximum speed that can be set de- pends on the vehicle. or button: pressing it to the resist- ance point and holding it there accelerates or decelerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accel- erate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed Press button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp Depending on how the vehicle is equip- ped, the indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster indicates whether the sys-
tem is switched on.
Desired speed The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol. The indicator lights up green: the system is active.
The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted.
No display: system is switched off.
Brief status display Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements are currently not ready for opera- tions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

105

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

PDC Park Distance Con- trol
The concept PDC supports you when parking. When you slowly approach an object with the rear of your car or with your front - depending on optional features - a signal tone is sounded:
General information Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on obsta- cles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa- tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve- hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci- dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.
Avoid driving fast with PDC
Avoid approaching an object too fast.
Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac- tive.
For technical reasons, the system may other- wise be too late in issuing a warning.

At a glance Button in the vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off
Switching on automatically PDC switches on automatically in the following situations:
If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.
If, with the appropriate equipment, obsta- cles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may turn off automatic activation via the radio:

Press button.

"Settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Auto PDC"

5. Select setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Switching on/off manually
Press button.
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.
Display
Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g. if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve- hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and to the rear of the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.
Volume The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad- justed similar to the sound and volume settings of the radio. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: For small children and animals. For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.

With external interference of the ultra- sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.
When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.
Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex- treme heat or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:
In heavy rain.
When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.
When sensors are covered in snow.
On rough road surfaces.
On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
In automatic car washes.
Through heavy pollution.
Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

107

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.
Malfunction A Check Control message, refer to page 60, is displayed in the instrument cluster. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full functionality: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. dimmedDo not put any stickers on sensors. When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best possi- ble parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and react accordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 106.

Hints
Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.
Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter- vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci- dent.
Transporting cargo Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter- vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci- dent.
Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi- cle over or onto curb if need be. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter- vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi- cle may become damaged.
An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati- cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.

108

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Maximum distance to row of parked vehi- cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m. Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m. Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Regarding the parking procedure Doors and tailgate closed. Parking brake released. When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set. At a glance Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing. To ensure full functionality: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Do not put stickers over sensors.
Switching on/off Switching on with the button
Press button. The LED lights up. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the radio. Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse. As soon as a suitable parking space is recog- nized by the system, the following query is dis- played on the radio display: "Start vehicle parking?" "OK": activate parking assistant. "Cancel": cancel parking assistant.
Switch off The system can be deactivated as follows:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

109

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Press button.

Switch off the ignition.

Indicator of the radio display

System status

Symbols, see arrows, on the

side of the vehicle illustrated.

Parking assistant is activated

and search for parking space

active.

Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the road as on the display.

The parking procedure is ac-

tive. Steering control has

been taken over by system.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de- activated.
Parking using the parking assistant
Check the traffic situation as well
Louds noises outside and inside the vehi- cle can drown out the parking assistant's and PDC's signals.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan- ger of an accident.
1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate it if needed.
The status of the parking space search is in- dicated on the display.
2. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indi- cated on the display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

Press button.

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering. If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the display. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h. Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces. If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small. When switching into other functions of the
radio. A Check Control message is displayed.
Resume An interrupted parking procedure can be con- tinued if needed. To do this, follow the instructions on the dis- play.
System limits
No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: In tight curves.

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
On slippery ground.
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.
With a mounted emergency wheel.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:
For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats.
With external interference of the ultra- sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.
When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.
Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex- treme heat or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

111

CONTROLS

Climate control

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

Air conditioner

1 Vent settings 2 Air flow 3 Temperature 4 Seat heating, right37 5 Cooling function

6 Recirculated-air mode 7 Rear window defroster 8 Windshield defroster 9 Seat heating, left37

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Climate control

CONTROLS

Note Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex-
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter- nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu- lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and window condensation increases.
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution Turn the wheel to select the de- sired program or the desired in- termediate setting.
Windows. Upper body region. Footwell. Windows, upper body region, and foot-
well.
Defrosts windows and removes condensation Direct the air distribution toward windows, in- crease the air flow and temperature, and, if needed, use the cooling function.
Air flow, manual Turn the ring to set the desired air volume. The higher the rate, the more ef- fective the heating or cooling will be.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re- duced automatically to save battery power.

Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.
Cooling function The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.
Press button. The air will be cooled and dehumidi- fied and, depending on the temperature set- ting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The air conditioner produces condensation wa- ter, refer to page 136, that will exit from below the car.
Recirculated-air mode You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu- tants in the immediate environment by tempo- rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:
LED off: outside air flows in continuously. LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma- nently blocked. To prevent window condensation, recirculated air mode switches off automatically after a cer- tain amount of time, depending on the external temperature. If the windows fog over, switch off recirculatedair mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

113

CONTROLS

Climate control

Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex- tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter- nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu- lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and window condensation increases.

Switching the system on/off

Switch off

Turn wheel for air quantity to the left until the control switches off.

Rear window defroster Press button. The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
When Green mode, refer to page 142, is acti- vated, the heater output is reduced.
Windshield defroster Press button. The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.

Switching on Set any air volume.
Microfilter In external and recirculated air mode the mi- crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 197, of your vehi- cle.

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Climate control
Automatic climate control

CONTROLS

1 Temperature, left 2 Display 3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 4 AUTO program 5 Air distribution, manual 6 Display 7 Temperature, right 8 Seat heating, right37 9 Maximum cooling

10 Cooling function
11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu- lated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosts windows and removes condensa- tion
15 Seat heating, left37

Climate control functions in detail Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if needed

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

115

CONTROLS

Climate control

by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant. Do not rapidly switch between different tem- perature settings. The automatic climate con- trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.
Air flow, manual To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro- gram first.
Turn the ring to set the desired air volume.
Automatic climate control displays the selected amount of air flow. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.
AUTO program
Press button. Air flow, air distribution and tempera- ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is di- rected to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 116, and the automatic recirculation control, refer to page 117, are automatically also switched on in the AUTO program. To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program activated, the auto- matic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the desired intensity.
The selected intensity is displayed on the auto- matic climate control.
Manual air distribution Press button repeatedly to select a program:
Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell. Footwell. Windows and footwell. Windows, upper body region, and footwell. Windows and upper body region. Windows.
Maximum cooling Press button. The system is set to the lowest temper-
ature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re- gion. The vents need to be open for this. The function is available with external tempera- tures beyond approx. 32 /0 and with the engine running. Adjust air flow with the program active.
Cooling function The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.
Press button. The air will be cooled and dehumidi- fied and, depending on the temperature set- ting, warmed again.

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Climate control

CONTROLS

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati- cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con- densation water, refer to page 136, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu- tants in the immediate environment by tempo- rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:
LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con- trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out- side air and shuts off automatically.
Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per- manently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated air mode switches off automatically after a cer- tain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.
If windows are fogged over, switch off the recir- culating mode and press the AUTO button. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex- tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter- nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu- lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and window condensation increases.
Rear window defroster
Press button.

The rear window defroster switches off auto- matically after a certain period of time.
When Green mode, refer to page 142, is acti- vated, the heater output is reduced.
Windshield defroster Press button. The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.

Defrosts windows and removes condensation
Press button. Ice and condensation are quickly re- moved from the windshield and the front side windows.
Adjust air flow with the program active. If the windows fog over, also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button.

Switching the system on/off

Switch off

Turn wheel for air quantity to the left until the control switches off.

Switching on Set any air volume.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated air mode the mi- crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 197, of your vehi- cle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

117

CONTROLS
Ventilation

Climate control

Turn knob for continuous opening and clos- ing of the vents.
Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrow.
Adjusting the ventilation Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's interior is too hot. Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. Indirect ventilation: If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's interior.

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag- ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the Universal Integrated Re- mote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
Your service center.
www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Universal Integrated Re- mote Control

At a glance

The concept
The Universal Integrated Remote Control can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The Universal Integrated Remote Con- trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans- mitters. To operate the remote control, the but- tons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote con- trol.
During programming
During programming and before activat- ing a device using the universal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, ani- mals or objects in the area of the remote-con- trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

1 LED 2 Programmable keys 3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

119

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys- tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the inte- rior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program- med on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be- gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the inte- rior rearview mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the handheld transmitter and repeat the step. Sev- eral more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the handheld transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. To program other functions on other but- tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the sys- tem to be controlled features an alternatingcode system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear- view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing

and continuous illumination of the LED will re- peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system, the Universal Integrated Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual to find out how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.
To synchronize:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchroni- zation is complete, the programmed func- tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans- mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the

120

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and re- peat the step. Several more attempts at dif- ferent distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the handheld transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the uni- versal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear- view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The inte- rior rearview mirror LED stays lit while the wire- less signal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap- proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button 2 Mirror display
Mirror display The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed: Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting. 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi- cle so that the compass operates correctly; re- fer to World map with compass zones.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

121

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con- trol button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corre- sponds with your location appears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com- pass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:
The wrong compass point is displayed.
The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.
Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but- ton again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Settings are stored automatically after approxi- mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be- hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter
At a glance
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console. Ashtray In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash- tray from the cupholder. Lighter
Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth- erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.

Connecting electrical de- vices
Hints
Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the factoryinstalled 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an in- creased power consumption.
Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.
Keep the airbag unfolding area clear Make sure that the devices and cable are located outside of the airbag's unfolding area; otherwise, its unfolding can be hampered or objects can be hurled through the interior when the airbag unfolds.
Sockets Sockets can be used for the running electrical devices with the engine running or with the ig-

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

123

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

nition switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.
In the center console

Do not connect any USB hard drives or USB hubs.
Do not use the USB interface for recharging external devices.
At a glance

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.
USB interface
The concept Connection for USB devices with music files. Hints Observe the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB interface. Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.

The USB interface is located in the front of the center console.
Cargo area
Cargo cover
General information When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.
Note Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose a risk to occupants, such as during braking and evasive maneuvers.
Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed. 1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate.

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.
Installation 1. Slide the cover forward horizontally into the
two side brackets until it audibly latches. 2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate. Enlarging the trunk General information The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The backrest of the left seat is connected to the backrest center sec- tion.

stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because of unexpected movement of the seat backrest.
Using the middle safety belt
If the middle safety belt in the rear is used, the larger side of the backrest must be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.
Push the headrests down, before the backrests are folded down
Before folding down the rear seat backrests, make sure that the corresponding headrest is pushed all the way down; otherwise, damage may result.
Folding down rear seat backrest The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the front or from the trunk.
Before the backrest is folded down, hook the corresponding safety belt into the safety belt on the side.

Hints
Danger of jamming
Before folding down the rear seat back- rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. Ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injury or dam- age may result.
Ensuring the stability of the child seat
When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas- tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad- justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the

Pull the release upward and fold the backrest toward the front.
Folding back the backrest
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged When you fold back the backrest make sure that it locks in place. When this happens the red warning field on the seat disappears. Otherwise transported cargo could shoot into the car's interior during braking or evasive ma- neuvers and endanger occupants.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

125

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.
Adjusting the backrest tilt
Do not install any child restraint systems When the backrests are set at steeper po- sition, do not install any child restraint systems on the backrest; otherwise, their protective ef- fect may be impaired.
To transport bulky items, the trunk can be ex- panded by setting the backrests at a steeper angle.
1. Released the back rest, and tilt it forward. 2. Fold the frame, arrow, up until it latches.

3. Fold back and latch the backrest.

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
Hints
No loose objects in the car's interior Do not stow any objects in the car's inte- rior without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants e.g., during braking and evasive maneuvers.
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash- board Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash- board.
Overview
The following storage compartments are avail- able in the vehicle interior: Storage compartment in front of the cu-
pholders. Storage tray in the center console. Glove compartment on the front passenger
side. Storage compartment above the glove
compartment.

Storage compartment in the center arm- rest.
Compartments in the doors. Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Glove compartment
Note Close the glove compartment again im- mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents. Opening
Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing Fold up the cover.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

127

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Storage compartment above the glove com- partment
Note Immediately close the storage compart- ment
Close the storage compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.
Opening

Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm rest upward, arrow 2. Adjusting the height

Press the lower edge of the cover.
Closing Push the cover back into the original position.

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center arm rest upward or downward into the desired height, arrow 2.

Compartments in the doors
Do not stow any breakable objects Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac- cident.
Center armrest
The center armrest contains a storage compart- ment.

Cupholders
Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.
Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain- ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam- age.

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Front
In the center console. Rear

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma- neuvers.
The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear.
Storage space under cargo floor panel

On 3-door models: in front of the rear seats and in the and in the side armrests.

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle tool kit.
To remove the onboard vehicle tool kit, fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward.

On 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.

Variable trunk floor
With the variable trunk floor, the trunk can be configured corresponding to transport require- ments. To do this, remove the trunk floor, and insert it in the desired position.
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 137.

Clothes hooks
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv- er's view.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

129

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Removing the cargo floor panel
On 5-door models: To change the position of the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear part of the cargo floor panel.

Folded up position
The variable cargo floor panel may not be used as a partition net to separate the trunk and the vehicle interior.
Only use the variable cargo floor in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.
Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, e.g.
If you don't follow these precautions you can endanger vehicle's occupants and damage the cargo floor during braking.

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the supports. The cargo floor panel can be removed from the trunk above the tail lamps.
Lower position

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower posi- tion and push it behind the locks on the left and right, arrow. You've reached the maximum cargo height.
Upper position

Larger objects can be transported.
Space for smaller objects remains between the fixed and variable trunk floor.

With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading surface is produced.
On 3-door models:
Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Storage compartments
On 5-door models: Maximum load in this position: 441 lbs/200 kg.
Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable trunk floor.

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

131

DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE CONTROLS DRIVING TIPS ENTERTAINMENT COMMUNICATION MOBILITY REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur- ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap- prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per- formance between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob- served if any of the components above-men- tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum- stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other- wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf- fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en- ter the vehicle interior.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

134

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Things to remember when driving

DRIVING TIPS

Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system while driving, while in idle posi- tion mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased risk of serious personal injury as well as property dam- age.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.
Mobile communication devices in the vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve- hicle
It is not recommended to use mobile phones, such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior without a direct connection to an external aer- ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and mo- bile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmis- sion will be conducted away from the vehicle interior.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re- duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan- ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete

loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
Observe water level and speed
Do not exceed the maximum water level and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmis- sion may be damaged.
Drive through calm water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef- fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, e.g.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

135

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or in heavy rain, press brake pedal ever so gently every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.
Hills
Avoid stressing the brakes
Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres- sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure.
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are un- available with the engine stopped.
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts. Other- wise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re- sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con- densation water develops collecting under- neath the vehicle. These traces of water under the vehicle are normal.
Ground clearance
Limited ground clearance Observe the limited ground clearance of the vehicle, e. g. while entering underground parking garages or when driving over obsta- cles. Otherwise, damages to the vehicle may result.

Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina- tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
Low mileage.
Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during brak- ing is not reached - thus discs don't get cleaned.

136

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

DRIVING TIPS

Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve- hicle's placard:
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve- hicle and unstable driving situations may result.

Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved ca- pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and in- creases the rate at which damage develops in- side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.
No fluids in the cargo area
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam- aged.
Heavy and hard objects
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the car's interior without securing them; oth- erwise, they may present a danger to occu- pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu- vers.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca- pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

137

DRIVING TIPS
Load
On 3-door models

Loading
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

On 5-door models

Without storage compartment package: to se- cure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, ar- row 1, in the cargo area.
With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi- ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

Securing cargo Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described;
otherwise it may present a danger to the occu- pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu- vers.
Smaller and lighter items: secure with re- taining straps or with draw straps.
Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Note Installation only possible with roof rack. Roof racks are available as special accessories.

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

DRIVING TIPS

Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Securing COOPER/COOPER D/ONE/ONE D

Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:
Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The roof load should not extend past the loading area.
Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.
Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps.
Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate.
Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler- ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

COOPER S/COOPER SD
The anchorage points, arrow 1, and the socket, arrow 2, are located below the covers in the bumper. Remove the covers before installing the rear luggage rack.

Rear luggage rack
General information Installation only possible with rear luggage rack preparation. Rear racks are available as special accessories.
Note Follow the installation instructions of the rear luggage rack. Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Power consumption
Function of tail lights Before driving off, check that the tail lights of the rear luggage rack are functioning properly; otherwise, there is a risk of endanger- ing other traffic.
The rear luggage rack lights must not consume more than: Turn signals: 42 watts per side. Rear lights: 50 watts per side. Brake lights: 84 watts in total. Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

139

DRIVING TIPS

Backup lamp: 42 watts in total.

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Saving fuel

DRIVING TIPS

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
General information
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif- ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv- ing style and regular maintenance can influ- ence fuel consumption and environmental im- pact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use
Remove roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero- dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con- sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re- sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.
Drive away without de- lay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

141

DRIVING TIPS

Saving fuel

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi- cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Starting with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When ac- celerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con- stant speed. The gear shift indicator, refer to page 65, of your vehicle indicates the most fuel efficient gear.

If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con- stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re- duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter- mined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions that are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, reel off these functions if they are not actually needed.

Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the accel- erator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle au- tomatically switches off the engine during a stop.

Have maintenance car- ried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your service center. Please also note the MINI Maintenance System, refer to page 197.
GREEN mode
The concept The GREEN mode supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted. For Steptronic transmission:

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Saving fuel

DRIVING TIPS

The Coasting driving condition is enabled under certain conditions.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto- matically decoupled from the transmission in selector lever position D. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged. An indicator provides information about the distance traveled in Coasting mode.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con- sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
At a glance The system includes the following MINIMAL functions and displays:
GREEN bonus range, refer to page 143.
GREEN tips driving instruction, refer to page 144.
GREEN climate control, refer to page 143.
Coasting driving condition, refer to page 144.
Activating GREEN mode
Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until GREEN mode is displayed in the instrument clus- ter.

Configuring GREEN mode

Via radio

"Settings"

2. Select between "Driving mode" or "GREEN Mode"

Configure the program.

Displays a reminder when the set GREEN mode speed is exceeded.
GREEN climate control "GREEN climate control" : Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. By making a slight change to the set tempera- ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior fuel consumption can be economized. The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior Additionally heat output to seats and exterior mirror is reduced. Exterior mirror heat is available when outside temperatures are very low.
Coasting Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag- ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page 144, with the engine idling. This function is only available in GREEN mode.
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps you extend your driving range. This may be displayed as the bo- nus range in the instrument clus- ter. The bonus range is shown in the range display. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.
Green display: efficient driving style. Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.

GREEN tip "GREEN speed warning":

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

143

DRIVING TIPS

Saving fuel

Driving style
A bar display in the instrument cluster indicates your current driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the bar's color:
Green display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the green range.
Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to green as soon as all conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving are met.

GREEN tip symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac- celerator or delay accelerating to al- low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.
Steptronic transmission: reel from S/M to D or avoid manual shift interven- tions.
Manual transmission: follow shifting instructions.
Manual transmission: engage neutral for engine stop.

GREEN tip driving instruction
Instructions tell you to reel to a more fuel-effi- cient driving style when you back off the accel- erator. Note The driving style display and GREEN mode tips in the instrument cluster appear when the GREEN mode display is activated. Activating driving style and GREEN mode tips: 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "GREEN Info"

Coasting
The concept The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis- sion when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is de- pressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again.
Hints Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving mode, refer to page 142.
Coasting is automatically activated when GREEN mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 96.

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Saving fuel

DRIVING TIPS

The function is available in a certain speed range.
A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup- ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Safety mode
The function is not available under one of the following conditions.
DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.
Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces- sive current.
Cruise control activated.

Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated via the radio, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill.

"Settings"

2. Select between "Driving mode" or "GREEN Mode"

3. "Coasting"

Settings are saved for the profile currently be- ing used.

Functional requirements
In GREEN mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap- prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are met:
Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
The selector lever is in selector lever posi- tion D.
Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the bar display be- low the tachometer is high- lighted green and appears at the zero point. The tachometer ap- proximately indicates idle speed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

145

ROCK ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE CONTROLS DRIVING TIPS ENTERTAINMENT COMMUNICATION MOBILITY REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

ENTERTAINMENT

Tone

General information
Settings are stored for the profile, refer to page 23, currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader

General information "Treble": treble adjustment. "Bass": depth adjustment. "Balance": left/right volume distribution. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Adjusting treble, bass, balance, and fader

"Settings",

"Media"

"Radio" or

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone settings.

4. Set the desired value.

Volume

General information
"Speed volume": speed-dependent volume control.
"PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared to the entertainment sound output.
"Gong": volume of the signal, such as the safety belt reminder, compared to the en- tertainment sound output.
"Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone call.
"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone:
"Microphone", "Loudspeak.".

Adjusting

"Settings",

"Media"

"Radio" or

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. Set the desired value.

Resetting the tone set- tings

"Settings",

"Media"

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

"Radio" or

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Radio

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio

6 Programmable memory buttons 7 "Media": open the menu 8 "Radio": open the menu 9 Changing the station
Sound output
Switching on/off If the ignition is switched off: press the left button.

General information
Settings are stored for the profile, refer to page 23, currently in use.

Muting
If the ignition is switched on or the en- gine is running: press the left button.

Overview

AM/FM station

1 Change waveband 2 Opening the main menu 3 Menu level back 4 Selecting menu items
Turn: highlight the menu item in the display or adjust the value.
Press: select the highlighted menu item or store the setting.
5 Open the options for the respective menu

General information
A list of the currently received stations can be set up and updated for each of the FM and AM wavebands.

Symbol

Meaning

Station is played.

Station is saved.

Station can be saved.

Update the list of receivable stations

"Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. "Update list"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

149

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio

Selecting a station

"Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select a station.

Selecting a station manually

"Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. "Manual search ( )"

4. Turn the right-hand knob until the desired frequency is displayed.

Changing the station About the radio:
Press button.

Via the buttons on the steering wheel: Press button.

The next station with reception or stored sta- tion is played. If traffic bulletins are activated, the next traffic information station is played. About the radio:
Press and hold this button.
Via the buttons on the steering wheel: Press and hold this button.

The waveband is traversed. After the button is released, the next station with reception is played.

Storing a station

"Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select a station.

4. Press the right button.
5. Select the memory location.
The stations can also be stored on the Favorites buttons, refer to page 152.

Renaming a station
When storing a station with RDS signal, the RDS information transferred during storing is ac- cepted as the station name. This name can be changed.
1. Select the station that is to be renamed.

Press button.

3. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait until the desired name appears.

4. Press the right-hand knob to store this name.

Displaying additional information
If a radio station broadcasts radio text or radio text plus, this information can be displayed, e.g., the track or the performer of the music. Availability, content and sequence are set by the radio station.

"Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

Press button.

4. "Station info"

RDS Radio Data System

The concept
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band.
When playing a station with multiple frequen- cies, the system automatically switches to the frequency with the best reception, if needed.

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Radio

ENTERTAINMENT

Switching on/off It is recommended to switch on RDS

"Radio"

2. "FM"

Press button.

4. "RDS"

HD RadioTM reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi- tal signals.
License conditions
HD Radio technology manufactured under li- cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U. S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and "Arc" logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception

"Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

Press button.

4. "HD Radio reception"

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital.

When setting a station with a digital signal, it may take a few seconds before the station plays in digital quality.

Information about HD Radio stations whose station name ends with ...HD or with ...HD1:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Information about HD Radio multicast stations whose station name ends with ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, there may be inter-

ruptions of the audible signal lasting several seconds. This depends on the reception.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.
1. Select the desired station.

Press button.

3. "Station info"

Stored stations

General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Symbol Meaning
1 ... 40 Memory location.

Stations out of the FM waveband.

Stations out of the AM waveband.

SAT Satellite radio station.

Calling up a station

"Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired memory location.

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

"Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. "Store station ( )"

4. Memory location to be selected.

The stations can also be stored on the Favorites buttons, refer to page 152.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

151

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio

Programmable memory buttons The first eight locations in the station list corre- spond to the assignment of the Favorites keys. To store the station:
1. Select a station. 2. Press and hold Favorites button until a sig-
nal sounds. Calling up a station:
1. Press Favorites button.

Shifting stations

"Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the station that is to be moved.

Press button.

5. "Move entry"

6. Select the memory location.

Deleting a station

"Radio"

2. "Presets"

Press button.

4. "Delete entry"

Deleting all stations

"Radio"

2. "Presets"

Press button.

4. "Delete presets"

5. Confirm "Are you sure you want to delete all saved stations?".

Satellite radio

General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack- ages. The packages must be subscribed by phone.

Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. This is usu- ally the case when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.

Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

"Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select the Unsubscribed category.

4. Select the channel.

Press button.

6. "Manage subscription"

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

7. Select the displayed phone number to sub- scribe to the channel.

The serial number, ESN, is needed to sub- scribe.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels

"Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select the channel.

Press button.

5. "Manage subscription"

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Radio

ENTERTAINMENT

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the displayed phone number to un- subscribe from the channel.
The serial number, ESN, is needed to un- subscribe.

Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels.

"Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select categories.

4. Select the channel.

The selected channel is stored in the remote control currently in use.

Changing the channel Press button.

Storing a channel

"Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select the channel.

4. Press the right button.

5. Select the memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use.

The channels can also be stored on the pro- grammable memory buttons.

Weather & Traffic jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region

"Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

Press button.

4. "Set area:"
5. Select region.
The region is stored in the remote control cur- rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump
Reception must be guaranteed in order to acti- vate or deactivate.

"Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

Press button.

4. "Weather & Traffic Jump"

Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available.

Hints
Reception may not be available in some sit- uations, such as under certain environmen- tal or topographic conditions.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages; next to tall build- ings; or near trees, mountains or powerful sources of radio interference.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

153

ENTERTAINMENT

Multimedia

External devices
At a glance

AUX-IN port
At a glance For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3 play- ers. Sound is played back on the vehicle loud- speakers. Recommendation: use medium tone and vol- ume settings on the audio device. The sound relies on the quality of the audio files.
Connecting

The concept
Various external devices can be connected to the vehicle. Sound is played back through the vehicle loudspeakers. The system can be oper- ated via the radio, depending on how the ex- ternal device is connected to the vehicle.

Symbol

Meaning

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

The AUX-In port is located at the front of the center console.
Connect the headphones or the line-out con- nector of the device to the AUX-in port.

Playback

1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track on the audio device.

"Media"

3. "AUX"

Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs mark- edly from the volume of the other audio sour- ces, we recommend adjusting the volume.

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Multimedia

ENTERTAINMENT

Adjusting the volume

"Media"

2. "AUX"

3. "Volume"

4. Set the desired volume.

USB device connection

USB audio interface

At a glance It is possible to connect external devices. Set via radio. Sound is played back on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
Connection via USB audio interface: Apple iPod/ iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 players, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are sup- ported by the USB audio interface.
Due to the large number of audio devices avail- able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device/mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.
Depending on the configuration of the audio files, for example bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s or the number of different compres- sion technologies, the files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information about suitable USB devices can be found at www.miniusa.com/bluetooth.
Audio files
Standard audio files and playlists can be played back.
File systems
Popular file systems for USB devices are sup- ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom- mended formats.

The USB port is located at the front of the cen- ter console.
Use a flexible adapter cable for connecting to help protect the USB audio port and the USB device from mechanical damage. The adapter cable supplied with the USB device would be ideal.

After the first connection
Information about the tracks and directories stored on the USB device is transferred into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device, the number of tracks and the folder structure.

Number of tracks
Information for a maximum of 9999 tracks and directories can be stored in the vehicle.

Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man- agement, DRM, cannot be played.

Playback

"Media"

2. "USB device"

Playback is started.

Track search Music tracks can be searched in three ways. Track from the current playlist. Via playlists stored in the audio device.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

155

ENTERTAINMENT

Multimedia

Via the directory structure in the audio de- vice.

Current playback
List of tracks that is currently being played. E. g. the list of tracks that was found in the track search or a playlist.

"Media"

2. "USB device"

3. "Current playback"

4. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

Searching directories

"Media"

2. "USB device"

3. "Browse directory"

Directories and titles at the top directory level are displayed. Should the USB device support external memory cards, their direc- tories are also displayed.

4. Select the directory.

5. Select the track at which the playback is to begin. Tracks in subdirectories are not played back.

Playback lists

"Media"

2. "USB device"

3. "Playlists"

4. Select the playback list.

Changing the track Press button.

A switch is made to the previous/next track from the currently played one.

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold this button. The current track is fast forwarded/ rewound with increasing speed.

Playback information
Information about the current track can be dis- played, such as the artist and the name of the track. This information is stored in the audio file and does not have to match the file name of the track.

Switching playback information on/off

"Media"

2. "USB device"

Press button.

4. "Show playback information"

Random playback
Playback in random order can be selected for all tracks of the USB device or for the current play.

Switching random playback for all tracks on/off

"Media"

2. "USB device"

Press button.

4. "All titles"

Switching random playback for the current playback on/off

"Media"

2. "USB device"

Press button.

4. "Current playback"

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Multimedia

ENTERTAINMENT

Apple iPod/iPhone port

4. Select the playback list.
5. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

The USB port is located at the front of the cen- ter console.
Use a flexible adapter cable for connecting, e.g., the original iPod/iPhone adapter cable.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup- ported by the USB audio interface.

Track search
Music tracks can searched in various ways.
Track from the current playlist.
Via playlists stored in the iPod/iPhone.
Via the categories saved for the music tracks, e.g., type of music, artist, composer, album, track.
In the media audio books and podcasts.

Current playback
List of tracks that is currently being played. E. g. the list of tracks that was found in the track search or a playlist.

"Media"

2. "USB device"

3. "Current playback"

4. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

Playback lists

"Media"

2. "USB device"

3. "Playlists"

Categories

"Media"

2. "USB device"

3. Select the category.

"Genres"

"Artists"

"Composers"

"Albums"

"Titles"

"Audio books"

"Podcasts"

4. A-Z search to reduce the list to a beginning letter to be entered.

5. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

Changing the track About the radio:
Press button.

Via the buttons on the steering wheel: Press button.

A switch is made to the previous/next track from the currently played one.
Fast forward/reverse About the radio:
Press and hold this button.
Via the buttons on the steering wheel:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

157

ENTERTAINMENT

Multimedia

Press and hold this button.

The current track is fast forwarded/rewound with increasing speed.

Random playback
The tracks of the current playback are played back in random order.

Switching random playback on/off

"Media"

2. "USB device"

Press button.

4. "Random"

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Multimedia

ENTERTAINMENT

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

159

CONNECT ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE CONTROLS DRIVING TIPS ENTERTAINMENT COMMUNICATION MOBILITY REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

COMMUNICATION

Bluetooth hands-free system

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
The concept
Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. After the mobile phones are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on. As soon as they are inside the vehicle they can be oper- ated via the radio and via the buttons on the steering wheel.
Hints
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob- serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve- hicle's occupants and other traffic.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.
At high temperatures, the charge functions of the mobile phone can be limited under certain circumstances, and some functions are no lon- ger executed.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is con- nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key- pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.
When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle, refer to the operating manual of the mobile phone.

Approved mobile phones
Accurate information about which mobile phones are supported with a Bluetooth inter- face is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.
These approved mobile phones, with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone installation package. The software ver- sion of the mobile phone may also be required.

"Telephone"

Press button.

3. "Bluetooth® info"

4. "System information"

Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone
Requirements The mobile phone is compatible. The mobile phone is ready for operation.

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Bluetooth hands-free system

COMMUNICATION

The ignition is switched on.
Bluetooth connection on the vehicle and on the mobile phone activated.
Bluetooth presets may need to be made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.
Set Bluetooth passkey for one-time use in the logon procedure.
Vehicle is stationary.

Bluetooth activation/deactivation

"Telephone"

Press button.

3. "Bluetooth®"

Pairing and connecting

Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi- cle's occupants and to other traffic, only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is station- ary.

"Telephone"

2. A mobile phone has not yet been paired: "OK"

A mobile phone has been paired: "Bluetooth®"

3. A mobile phone has not yet been paired: the Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display.

A mobile phone has not yet been paired: "Add new phone". The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. Select this.
5. Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and on the display
Or
Compare the control number on the display with the control number in the display of the mobile phone and confirm.
Four mobile phones can be logged in on the vehicle, and one mobile phone can be con- nected to the vehicle.

Following the initial pairing
Mobile phone is connected to the vehicle after a brief time.
The phone book entries stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle.
Specific settings may be necessary in some mo- bile phones, e.g., authorization or a secure con- nection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone

"Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth®"

3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con- nected.

Unpairing the mobile phone

"Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth®"

3. Highlight any mobile phone that is to be re- moved.

Press button.

5. "Remove device" or "Remove all devices"

What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 162.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

163

COMMUNICATION

Bluetooth hands-free system

The mobile phone could not be paired or con- nected.
Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and on the radio.
Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Do the control numbers on the mobile phone and vehicle match? Repeat the pair- ing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? Delete connections to other devices.
Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat- tery life? Charge the mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts?
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
Ambient temperature too high or too low? Do not subject the mobile phone to ex- treme ambient temperatures.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed, or they are incomplete.
Transmission of the entries is not yet com- plete.
It is possible that only the phone book en- tries from the mobile phone or from the SIM card are transmitted.
It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.
The number of phone book entries being stored is too high.
The phone connection quality is poor.
It may be possible to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone.
Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con- tact the hotline or the service center.

Controls

Adjusting the volume
During an active call, turn the left knob on the radio until the desired volume is selected.

Automatic volume control
The automatic volume control can only be ad- justed during an active conversation.

"Settings"

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or "Loudspeak."

5. Adjusting: press and turn right button.

6. Storing: press right button.

Incoming call
Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Other- wise, only the phone number or "Unknown caller"is displayed.

Accepting a call

About the radio "Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press button.

Via the instrument cluster "Accept"

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Bluetooth hands-free system

COMMUNICATION

Rejecting a call

About the radio "Reject"

Via the instrument cluster "Reject"

Ending a call

About the radio "End call ( )"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press button.

Via the instrument cluster "End call"

Dialing a number

"Telephone"

2. "Dial number"

3. Enter numbers using the right rotary knob.

4. Select the symbol.

Calls with multiple parties

Accepting a second call
If a second call is received during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The second call is accepted and the current call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list. "Phone book" "Outgoing calls" "Received calls"

The first call is put on hold.

Switching between two calls, hold call You can switch between two calls.
Select line with symbol in order to switch between the conversations.
Active conversation. Call on hold.

Establishing/ending a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele- phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.

"Conference call"

When terminating the conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by an- other party, the other call is continued if needed.

Muting the microphone When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.
"Mute microphone"
The muted microphone is automatically muted:
When a new connection is established.
If using call-switching to switch between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac- cess to network services or for controlling devi- ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an- swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose. The DTMF code is only available during an active call.
1. "Keypad dialing"
2. Enter DTMF code.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

165

COMMUNICATION

Bluetooth hands-free system

Favorites
Up to 12 phone numbers can be stored in the Favorites. Only the occupied places of the Fa- vorites list are displayed.

Storing Favorites

"Telephone"

2. "Favorites"

"Add favorite"

4. Select the list from which the entry is to be added:

"Phone book"

"Outgoing calls"

"Received calls"

5. Select entry from list and desired phone number.

6. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Move favorite 1. Highlight the desired favorite.

Press button and "Move favorite".

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

3. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Remove from Favorites 1. Highlight the desired favorite.

Press button.

3. "Remove from favorites"

Deleting Favorites

Press button.

2. "Delete favorites"

3. "OK"

Phone book

General information
The telephone accesses the contacts stored in the mobile phone. All contacts for which a tele- phone number is entered are displayed. Maxi- mally 4 phone numbers per contact can be dis- played.

Displaying
Phone book entries are automatically transmit- ted from the mobile phone to the vehicle, de- pending on the mobile phone. Fig. 4 Entries in the phone book: "Keyword search"

"Telephone"

2. "Phone book"

The symbols show how the entries are stored on the mobile phone.

Symbol

Meaning

Mobile phone number.

Home phone number.

Business phone number.

Selecting the sorting order of the names
The phone book entries can be displayed in dif- ferent sequences. Depending on how the con- tacts are stored in the mobile phone, the sort- ing order of the names may differ from the selected sorting order.

Press button.

2. "Display:""Last/First name" or "First/Last name"

3. "First name Last name" or "Last name, First name"

Calling 1. Select contact. 2. Select the desired phone number.

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Bluetooth hands-free system

COMMUNICATION

Add phone numbers to Favorites 1. Mark the entry from the list.

Press button and "Add to

favorites".

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

3. Select the desired phone number as needed.

4. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Redialing
The list of the last 20 numbers of the mobile phone selected are displayed.

"Telephone"

2. "Redial"

Add phone numbers to Favorites 1. Mark the entry from the list.

Press button and "Add to

favorites".

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

3. Select the desired phone number as needed.

4. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Dialing the number via the instrument cluster This is possible when there is no active call.

Press button on the steering wheel.

The last numbers selected are displayed in the instrument cluster.

2. If necessary, select another number.

Press the key again to establish the

connection.

Received calls
The list of the 20 last received or missed calls of the cell phone are displayed.

"Telephone"

2. "Received calls"

Add phone numbers to Favorites 1. Mark the entry from the list.

Press button and "Add to

favorites".

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

3. Select the desired phone number as needed.

4. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Hands-free system

General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the handsfree system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free sys- tem.
If the system does not switch over automati- cally, follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

167

COMMUNICATION

Bluetooth hands-free system

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operat- ing instructions.

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Bluetooth hands-free system

COMMUNICATION

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

169

MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE CONTROLS DRIVING TIPS ENTERTAINMENT COMMUNICATION MOBILITY REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

MOBILITY

Refueling

2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.
3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

General information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 174, prior to refueling.
Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.
Fuel lid
Opening 1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge
and open it.

Closing 1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Refueling

MOBILITY

Remove the cover. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol, arrow. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ- ment and damaging the vehicle.
Handling fuels Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

173

MOBILITY

Fuel

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
Fuel recommendation
Note
General fuel quality Even fuels that conform to the specifica- tions can be of low quality. This may cause en- gine problems, for instance poor engine startup behavior, poor handling and/or poor performance. Switch gas stations or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.
Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con- taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with- out metallic additives. Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso- line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, as this can cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other compo- nents.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel- ing. Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case.
Do not use a fuel with a higher percent- age of ethanol Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per- centage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.
Recommended fuel grade John Cooper Works: Super Plus, 98 RON. MINI recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini- mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per- formance.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.
Fuel quality The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition- ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environ-

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

mental conditions such as high ambient tem- perature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec- ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade -- AKI num- ber -- for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en- gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur- chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled mainte- nance.

Fuel

MOBILITY

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

175

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Moni- tor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Checking the inflation pressure of the emergency wheel

Checking the tire inflation pressure
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with in- correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stabil- ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla- tion pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflation pressure increases along with the tire's temper- ature. The tire inflation pressure specifications

Located behind the bumper on the underside of the vehicle is an opening for checking the tire inflation pressure.
Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 177, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem- perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap- proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center.

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum permitted driving speed. Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 177, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; oth- erwise, tire damage and accidents may result.

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.4 / 35 +S XL RSC
175/65 R 15 84 H M +S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M +S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

2.4 / 35

Compact wheel T 115/70 R 15 90 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

177

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC

2.4 / 35

175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.6 / 38 +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

185/50 R 17 86 H M 2.9 /42 +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 Y XL Std
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

2.7 / 39

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

175/65 R 15 84 H M 2.5 / 36 +S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M +S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC

2.3 / 33

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Tire size

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

205/45 R 17 88 V M 2.5 / 36 +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC

2.4 / 35

175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.6 / 38 +S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

2.6 / 38

Compact wheel

Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 M 50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Other- wise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

175/65 R 15 84 H M 2.8 / 41 +S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M +S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
175/60 R 16 86 H M +S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

2.6 / 38

Compact wheel T 115/70 R 15 90 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

179

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

185/50 R 17 86 H 3.1 / 45 M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 Y XL Std
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W 3.4 / 49 XL RSC

2.9 /42 3.2 / 46

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

175/65 R 15 84 H M 2.8 / 41 +S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M +S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC

2.6 / 38

175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.8 / 41 +S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

2.8 / 41

Compact wheel T 115/70 R 15 90 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

Tire identification marks
Tire size 205/45 R 17 84 V 205: nominal width in mm

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 17: rim diameter in inches 84: load rating, not for ZR tires F: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 0115: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age DOT ... 0115: the tire was manufactured in the 1st week of 2015.
Recommendation Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under control- led conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hy- droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma- terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

181

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

laboratory test wheel than the minimum re- quired by law.
Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 184, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob- jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Hints Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus- pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es- pecially if your vehicle is equipped with lowprofile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de- fects: Unusual vibrations while driving. Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re- duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans- ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be- come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic.
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re- placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re- sult.

Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
You should only use wheels and tires that have been approved by the vehicle manufac- turer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., de- spite having the same official size ratings, varia- tions can lead to chassis contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu- ate non-approved wheels and tires to deter- mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vehicle.
Recommended tire brands

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel-tire combina- tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be obtained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re- sponse, use only tires with a single tread con- figuration from a single manufacturer.

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve- hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.
New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur- ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec- ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

183

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de- sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.
Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam- age and accidents can occur.
Run-flat tires If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions.
The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
After rotating, check the tire pressure and cor- rect if needed.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres- sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of tires that are selfsupporting to a limited degree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re- main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 86. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 82.
Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures in case of a breakdown Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system. Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. Secure the vehicle against rolling away by set- ting the parking brake. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehi- cle and ensure that they remain outside the im- mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an ap- propriate distance. Comply with all safety guidelines and regula- tions.
Mobility System

If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire.
Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.
The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed.
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.
Storage The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel.
Sealant container

The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.
Hints
Follow the instructions on using the Mobi- lity System found on the compressor and sealant container.
Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec- tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm or more.
Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable.

Sealant container, arrow 1. Filling hose, arrow 2. Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

185

MOBILITY Compressor

Wheels and tires
2. Take the connection hose completely out of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.

1 On/off reel 2 Holder for bottle 3 Reduce inflation pressure 4 Inflation pressure dial 5 Compressor 6 Connector/cable for socket 7 Connection hose -- stowed in the bottom
of the compressor
Filling the tire with sealant 1. Shake the sealant container.

3. Attach the connection hose to the connec- tor of the sealant container, ensuring that it engages audibly.

4. Slide the sealant container upright into the holder on the compressor housing, ensur- ing that it engages audibly.

186

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve of the defective wheel.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into a power socket inside the ve- hicle.

Switch off the compressor after 10 mi- nutes
Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center.

7. With the ignition turned on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

Stowing the Mobility System
1. Remove the connection hose of the sealant container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the seal- ant container.
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con- nection hose in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi- cle.

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi- nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 mls/10 km/h to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

187

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

To correct the tire inflation pressure 1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve stem.

Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 84.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 81.
Replace the defective tire and the sealant con- tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi- ble.

3. Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor.

Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehi- cle, classified as road-safe and approved. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center.

4. Insert the connector into a power socket in- side the vehicle.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar. Increase pressure: with the ignition turned on or the engine running, reel on the compressor. To reduce the pressure: press the but- ton on the compressor.

Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:
175/65 R 15.
175/60 R 16.
John Cooper Works:
185/50 R 17
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf- ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed.

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Wheels and tires
Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

MOBILITY

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

189

MOBILITY

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Washer fluid reservoir 2 Vehicle identification number 3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal 6 Coolant reservoir

Hood
Hints Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide- lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Engine compartment

MOBILITY

Never reach into the engine compart- ment Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in- jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.
Fold down wiper arm Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this may result in damage.
Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked

Let the hood fall from approx. 16 in/40 cm, ar- row.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.
Closing the hood Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im- mediately and close it securely.
Danger of jamming Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

191

MOBILITY

Engine oil

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. The engine oil consumption can increase in case of, for example: Sporty driving. Break-in the engine. Idling of the engine. Usage of non-approved engine oil grades. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling. The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement. The electronic oil measurement has two meas- uring principles: Status display. Detailed measurement.

Electronic oil measure- ment

Status display
The concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the radio display. If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap- prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil level

Press button.

"Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de- pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next 125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to page 193.
Engine oil level too low
Add engine oil immediately; otherwise, an insufficient amount of engine oil could result in engine damage.

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Engine oil

MOBILITY

Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to engine damage.

Adding engine oil
General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi- cle before engine oil is added.

Detailed measurement

Oil filler neck

The concept In the detailed measurement the engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level or an overfilling is detected, a check con- trol message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in- creased somewhat.
Requirements Vehicle is on level road.
Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed.
Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se- lector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
Engine is running and is at operating tem- perature.
Performing a detailed measurement In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level:
Confirm message regarding engine oil level dis- play.
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.

Only replenish the maximum engine oil amount of 1 US quart/liter if the signal is dis- played in the instrument cluster.
After refilling, perform a detailed measure- ment, refer to page 193.
Adding engine oil Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; otherwise, this may cause engine damage.
Do not add too much engine oil When too much engine oil is added, im- mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.
Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil- dren and observe the warnings on the contain- ers to prevent health risks.
Engine oil types to add

Hints
No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam- age.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

193

MOBILITY

Engine oil

Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.
Suitable engine oil types You can add engine oils that meet the follow- ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Further information regarding the oil specifica- tions and viscosities of MINI engine oils can be inquired with the service center.
Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en- gine oil with the following oil rating can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior oil rating
Engine oil change:
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil.

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Coolant

MOBILITY

Coolant

2. Turn the coolant reservoir lid counterclock- wise to unscrew and open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.
Adding 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the coolant reservoir lid counterclock-
wise to unscrew and open it.

Coolant level
Checking There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir. 1. Let the engine cool.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

195

MOBILITY

Coolant

4. Close cap. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen- tal protection regulations when dispos- ing of coolant and coolant additives.

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Maintenance

MOBILITY

Maintenance

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op- erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary according to the country-specific version. Re- placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri- cants and wear materials are calculated sepa- rately. Additional information is available from the service center.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service recog- nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.
Detailed information on service requirements, refer to page 65, can be displayed on the radio.

For service data
Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and sug- gest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re- mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat- tery was disconnected are not taken into ac- count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if needed, chang- ing the engine oil and the microfilter/activatedcharcoal filter.
Service and Warranty In- formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Book- let for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regu- lar maintenance procedures recorded in the ve- hicle's Service and Warranty Information Book- let for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries are proof of regular maintenance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

197

MOBILITY

Maintenance

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
Note
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work- shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.
Position

components, in particular the catalytic con- verter.

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi- cle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos- sible.
The warning lamp flashes under certain cir- cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir- ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys- tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri- ous engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Replacing components

MOBILITY

Replacing components

Folding down wipers before opening the hood Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.
Replacing the wiper blades 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 2. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the trough under the cargo area floor.
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate trim.

3. Pull the wiper blade down first out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
Then pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.

Wiper blade replacement
Hints
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.

4. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re- verse order.
5. Fold down the wipers.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

199

MOBILITY

Replacing components

Replace the rear wiper blade 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
3. Continue turning the wiper blade all the way so that it pops out of the holder.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the holder until you hear it snap into place.
5. Fold the wipers in.
Lamp and bulb replace- ment
General information Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar those or if they have not been described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.
Hints Lights and bulbs
Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you should always reel off the lights affected to prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting di- odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.
Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex- ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden- sation evaporates after a short time. The head- light glass does not need to be changed.
If the headlights do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this.

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Replacing components

Front lights, bulb replacement Overview Halogen headlights

Bug light

MOBILITY

1 Low beams/high beams 2 Turn signal
LED headlights

1 Parking lights 2 Daytime running lights 3 Fog lights
LED bug light

1 Daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams 3 Turn signal

1 Parking lights 2 Fog lights
LED low beams/LED high beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. The lights feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
halogen low beams/halogen high beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

201

MOBILITY

Replacing components

Bulbs: H4
1. Open the hood, refer to page 191. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and
remove.

With white turn signal lights: PWY24W
1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and
remove.

3. Pull off the connector. 4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.

3. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise, and remove it.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlight hous- ing.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.
Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. Bulbs: PW24W

4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if needed, loosen it with small tilting move- ments if possible.

5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

202

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Replacing components

MOBILITY

LED parking lights/LED fog lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200.
The lights feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Turn the bulb holder of the fog lamp counterclockwise, arrow 3, and re- move.

Parking lights/fog lights/daytime running lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. Bulbs: Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W
Parking lights for LED headlights: W5W NBV Daytime running light: PSX24W Fog lamp: H8 1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and
remove.

5. Insert the new bulbs and install the cover in the reverse order. When installing the daytime running lights, audibly latch the bulb holder first at the bottom, then at the top.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview

Vehicles with a rear fog lamp

3. Remove the corresponding connector.
4. Remove bulb holder of the parking lamp, arrow 1, by turning it counter- clockwise.
Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
Remove the bulb holder of the daytime running lights, arrow 2, by pressing to- gether the top and bottom latch mech- anism.
For better accessibility, if needed, re- move the bulb of the fog lamp before- hand.

1 Side tail lights 2 Rear fog lamp 3 License plate lamp 4 Third brake lamp

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

203

MOBILITY

Replacing components

Vehicle with two rear fog lights
1 Side tail lights 2 Rear fog lights 3 License plate lamp 4 Third brake lamp Side tail lights

3 Brake light 4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. Bulbs: P21W 1. Open the tailgate, refer to page 27. 2. Remove left or right cover.

1 Brake lights/tail lights 2 Turn signal 3 Reversing lights
Side LED tail lights

3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con- nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder. Press the latches together, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening. 5. Press the defective bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights Arrow 2: turn signal

1 Tail lights 2 Turn signal
204

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Arrow 3: reversing light

Replacing components

MOBILITY

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas- teners.
Central brake lamp and license plate lamp Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. The lights feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Vehicles with a rear fog lamp Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. Bulbs: W16W
1. On vehicles with heat shield: Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

4. Replace defective bulb. 5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Vehicle with two rear fog lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. Bulbs: W16W Left rear fog lamp:
1. On vehicles with heat shield: Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

2. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog lamp.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

205

MOBILITY

Replacing components

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

With white lens: WY5W diadem
1. Pull the turn signal housing at the top out of the catch, then unhook it at the bottom.

4. Replace defective bulb.
5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.
Right fog lamp:
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

2. Replace defective bulb. 3. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 200. Bulbs: With orange lens: W5W

3. Replace the bulb. 4. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and install the turn signal hous- ing. First hook the turn signal housing to the bottom, then at the top press it into the latch.
Changing wheels
Hints When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. Which is why no spare tire is available. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Replacing components

MOBILITY

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

Use the vehicle jack only for changing wheels
Use the vehicle jack only for changing wheels. Do not attempt to use it to jack up a different type of vehicle or cargo of any kind; otherwise, this could cause material damage and personal injury.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo- cated at the positions shown.
Emergency wheel
Hints
Safety measures in case of a breakdown or a wheel change
Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system.
Set the parking brake, and engage first gear or selector lever position P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out- side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp at an appro- priate distance. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.
Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip- pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the side.
Do not place wood blocks or similar items under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot reach its carrying capacity because of the restricted height.
If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine; other- wise, a fatal hazard exists.

Removing the emergency wheel The emergency wheel is housed in a well on the underbody of the vehicle. The screw con- nection of the emergency wheel is located in the trunk under the floor mat, on the floor of the storage compartment for the wheel chang- ing set. 1. Loosen the nut from the wheel change set
using the wheel wrench.
2. Remove the retaining plate. 3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread
and hold in place with one hand.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

207

MOBILITY

Replacing components

4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer- gency wheel well using the hexagon at- tached to retaining plate.

jacking point with the entire surface on the ground.

5. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel wrench.
6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench 7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel un-
der the vehicle toward the rear. 8. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel
from the well. 9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.
Prepare wheel change 1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to
page 207. 2. With the wheel chock from the wheel
change set, also secure the vehicle against rolling away at the front wheel of the oppo- site side. 3. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up the vehicle 1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle

2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan- gular recess of the jacking point for crank- ing it up.
3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts off of the ground.
Wheel mounting 1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove
the wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two bolts.
If original MINI light alloy wheels are not mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also have to be used.
3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight-
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
Check for secure seating of the lug bolts
For safety reasons, have the secure seating of the lug bolts checked with a calibrated torque wrench; otherwise, a safety hazard results from incorrectly tightened lug bolts.
2. Stow the defective wheel in the trunk.

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Replacing components

MOBILITY

The defective wheel cannot be stored in the emergency wheel bracket because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op- portunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 85. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 82. 5. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos- sible.
Driving with emergency wheel
Watch the speed when driving with the emergency wheel Drive conservatively and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, changed driving characteristics such as reduced lane stability while braking, extended braking distance and changed self-steering properties in the limit area.
Mount one emergency wheel only Only a single emergency wheel may be mounted. Reinstall wheels and tires of the orig- inal size as quickly as possible; otherwise, there is a safety risk.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec- trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and

systems or functions may not be fully availa- ble.
After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort features are fully available and that any Check Control messages are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
General information Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol- lowing cases: When making frequent short-distance
drives. If the vehicle is not used for prolonged peri-
ods, longer than a month. Steptronic transmission: when parked for
long periods of time in selector lever posi- tion D, R or N.
Note
Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the factoryinstalled 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an in- creased power consumption.
Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 212, in the engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reset. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: Time: update.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

209

MOBILITY

Replacing components

Date: update.
Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy- cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Note Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi- tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re- sulting in a fire in the vehicle.
Replacing fuse The fuses are located in the passenger footwell under the dashboard.
1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.

2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2.
Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.
3. Replace the fuse in question.
4. The installation is done in reverse order from the removal.

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

Hazard warning flash- ers

First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in the cargo area. Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg- ularly and replace any expired items promptly.

The button is located above the radio.

Jump-starting
General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Hints
Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical compo- nents while the engine is running.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce- dure.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

211

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

Preparation Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be-
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other- wise, there is a danger of short circuits. 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve-
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa- tion can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi- cle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive ter- minal. Open the lid of the starting aid terminal.

The body ground acts as the negative terminal of the battery.
Connecting the cables 1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.

Tow truck

Tow-starting and towing

Note
Tow-starting and towing For towing the vehicle turn, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc- tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.
Switching off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to page 86.
Steptronic transmission: transporting your vehicle
Note Your vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a break- down.
Tow the vehicle only with the front axle raised Have the vehicle towed only with the front axle raised or transported on a loading platform; otherwise, damage may occur.

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po- sitioning the vehicle.
Manual transmission
Observe before towing your vehicle Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing When the parking brake is blocked The parking brake cannot be released
manually. Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged. Contact your service center.
Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions; otherwise, vehicle damage or accidents may occur.
Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

213

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.
Larger steering wheel movements are re- quired.
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re- sponse.
Tow truck
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.
Towing other vehicles
Hints Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re- sponse.
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de- pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win- dow.
Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit- ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car- ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the MINI. It is located under the

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

cargo floor panel, next to the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 199.
Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur. Screw thread for tow fitting
COOPER/COOPER D/ONE/ONE D
COOPER S/COOPER SD

JOHN COOPER WORKS
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel. Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 211. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat- alytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 47, on. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system. 6. Have the vehicle checked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

215

MOBILITY

Care

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys- tems. The respectively applicable country provi- sions must be observed when using the respec- tive features and systems.
Car washes
General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam- age the vehicle.
Hints
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 /60 .
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main- tained. Holding them too close or using exces- sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.

Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with high-pressure washers When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors and camera lenses on the outside of the vehicle for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Automatic car washes
Hints Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. Unscrew the rod antenna. Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 53, to avoid unintentional wiper acti- vation. In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instructions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 31.
Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.
Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps: Manual transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Shift to neutral.

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Care

MOBILITY

3. Switch the engine off.
4. Switch on the ignition.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button to reel off the engine.
In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and two Check-Control messages are displayed.
A signal sounds when you leave the vehicle while in selector lever position N.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.
To start the engine:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Headlights Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win- dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care
Car care products MINI recommends using cleaning and care products from MINI, since these have been tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi- cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan- gerous and harmful to your health.
Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con- taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af- fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre- quency and extent of your car care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings must be removed im- mediately to prevent the finish from being al- tered or discolored.
Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be- cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

217

MOBILITY

Care

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.
Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma- terial vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufac- turer's instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia- tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic- ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans- ers.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili- con-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or noises.
Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo- nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.
Plastic components These include: Imitation leather surfaces. Roofliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matt black spray-coated components. Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water. Do not soak the roofliner.
No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol- vents Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.
Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Care

MOBILITY

Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, e.g.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte- rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Additional information is available from the service center.

Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass deter- gent.

Displays/Screens
Cleaning displays and screens Do not use any chemical or household cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af- fected.
Keeping out moisture Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit; otherwise, electrical components can be damaged.
Avoid pressure Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

219

FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

AT A GLANCE CONTROLS DRIVING TIPS ENTERTAINMENT COMMUNICATION MOBILITY REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

REFERENCE

Technical data

Vehicle features and op- tions
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

Note
The technical data and specifications in this Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for example, due to the selected special equip- ment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed values can be

found in the approval documents, on informa- tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained from the service center.
The information in the vehicle documents al- ways has priority.

Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
MINI 3-door
Width with mirrors
Width without mirrors
Height
Length
Cooper
Cooper S
John Cooper Works
Wheelbase
Smallest turning radius diam.

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example, due to the selected special equip- ment, tires, load and chassis version.

inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm
inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm ft/m

76.1/1,932 68.0/1,727 55.7/1,414
151.1/3,837 151.9/3,858 152.5/3,874 98.2/2,495 35.4/10.8

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Technical data

REFERENCE

MINI 5-door
Width with mirrors Width without mirrors Height Length Cooper Cooper S Wheelbase Smallest turning radius diam.

inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm
inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm ft/m

76.1/1,932 68.0/1,727 56.1/1,425
157.4/3,998 158.0/4,013 101.1/2,567 36.2/11.02

Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehicles with manual transmission; the values following
MINI Cooper, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight
Load
Approved front axle load
Approved rear axle load
Approved roof load capacity
Cargo area capacity

the slash apply to vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

lbs

3,565

1,617

lbs

790/725

358/329

lbs

1,920/1,990

871/903

lbs

1,725/1,685

782/764

lbs

132

cu ft

8.734.0

211731

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

223

REFERENCE

Technical data

MINI Cooper, 5-door
Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity
MINI Cooper S, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity

lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg cu ft L
lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg cu ft L

3,795 1,721 885/820 401/372 1,995/2,065 905/937 1,880/1,860 853/844 165 75 13.140.7 278941
3,620/3,650 1,642/1,656 775/770 352/349 2,025/2,060 919/934 1,690 767 132 60 8.734.0 211731

224

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

MINI Cooper S, 5-door
Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity
MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity

Technical data

REFERENCE

lbs

3,860/3,900

1,751/1,769

lbs

885

401

lbs

2,085/2,125

946/964

lbs

1,880

853

lbs

165

cu ft

13.140.7

278941

lbs

3,720/3,765

1,687/1,708

lbs

775

352

lbs

2,065/2,105

937/955

lbs

1,725

782

lbs

132

cu ft

8.734.0

211731

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

225

REFERENCE

Technical data

Capacities
MINI
Fuel tank, approx. Cooper, Cooper S, John Cooper Works

US gal/liters

11.6/44

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Appendix

REFERENCE

Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Handbook for Ve- hicle are listed here.
Additional information on the description of the Head-up Display in the "Displays" chapter for John Cooper Works models: John Cooper Works: Sport displays in the Head-up Display General information The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist with a sporty driving style. Switching on 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displayed information" 4. "Sport displays" With navigation system: if the sport displays are switched on, no navigation content will be dis- played on the Head-up Display. Display
1 Speed 2 Shift point indicator 3 Gear display

4 Current engine speed 5 Warning field, speed
Shift point indicator
The concept Shift point indicator in the Head-up Display in- dicates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.
Functional requirements Steptronic transmission:
Manual mode M/S and if necessary the Dy- namic Traction Control DTC are activated. Press the gas pedal all the way down.
Switching on Shift point indicators are displayed in the Headup if the sport displays, refer to page 91,are switched on.
1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displayed information" 4. "Sport displays"
Display Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the upcoming upshift moment. As soon as the red fields light up, shift up im- mediately. When the permitted maximum speed is reached, all shift point indicators flash. When the maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect the engine.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

227

REFERENCE

228

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

229

REFERENCE

230

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

License Texts and Certifications

REFERENCE

License Texts and Certifications

Bluetooth
Brazil
Europe
Register model name: UK001 Product code: MRBE307A Hrvatski Ovim, Alpine, izjavljuje da ovaj tip RADIO UKL zadovoljava bitne zahtjeve i ostale vazece odrednice, a sukladno Smjernici 1999/5/EC. Cestina Alpine tímto prohlasuje, ze tento RADIO UKL je ve shod se základními pozadavky a dalsími príslusnými ustanoveními smernice 1999/5/ES. Dansk Undertegnede Alpine erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr RADIO UKL overholder de væ-

sentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Alpine, dass sich das Gerät RADIO UKL in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übri- gen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine seadme RADIO UKL vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõue- tele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teis- tele asjakohastele sätetele.
English Hereby, Alpine, declares that this RADIO UKL is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente Alpine declara que el RADIO UKL cumple con los requisitos esen- ciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplica- bles o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Alpine RADIO UKL 1999/5/.
Français Par la présente Alpine déclare que l'appareil RADIO UKL est conforme aux exigences essen- tielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

231

REFERENCE

License Texts and Certifications

Italiano Con la presente Alpine dichiara che questo RADIO UKL è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviesu Ar so Alpine deklar, ka RADIO UKL atbilst Dir- ektvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un cit- iem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvi Siuo Alpine deklaruoja, kad sis RADIO UKL ati- tinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

Slovensko Alpine izjavlja, da je ta RADIO UKL v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolocili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky Alpine týmto vyhlasuje, ze RADIO UKL spa zá- kladné poziadavky a vsetky príslusné ustanove- nia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi Alpine vakuuttaa täten että RADIO UKL tyyppi- nen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin mui- den ehtojen mukainen.

Nederlands
Hierbij verklaart Alpine dat het toestel RADIO UKL in overeen-stemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Svenska
Härmed intygar Alpine att denna RADIO UKL står I överens-stämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestäm- melser som fram-går av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Malti
Hawnhekk, Alpine, jiddikjara li dan RADIO UKL jikkonforma mal-tigijiet essenzjali u ma prov- vedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirret- tiva 1999/5/EC.
Magyar
Alulírott, Alpine nyilatkozom, hogy a RADIO UKL megfelel a vonatkozó alapvet követelmé- nyeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elírá- sainak.

Íslenska Hér með lýsir Alpine yfir því að RADIO UKL er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Norsk Alpine erklærer herved at utstyret RADIO UKL er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Polski
Niniejszym Alpine owiadcza, e RADIO UKL jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyr- ektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português
Alpine declara que este RADIO UKL está con- forme com os requisitos essenciais e outras dis- posições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

License Texts and Certifications

REFERENCE

Taiwan
USA (FCC) and Canada (IC) Register model name: UK002 Product code: MRBE309A FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stand- ard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any in- terference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d'Industrie Can- ada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioé- lectrique subi, même si le brouillage est suscep- tible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled en- vironment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to com- ply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from per- son's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'ex- position aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les rè- gles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes di- rectrices d'exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d'exposition aux fréquences radioé- lectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est consid- érée conforme sans évaluation de l'exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipe- ment doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des ex- trémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Canada IC: 7812D-S180056
Operation is subject to the following two condi- tions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
USA FCC ID: KR5S180052056
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

233

REFERENCE

License Texts and Certifications

South Korea Continental S180052056 KCC-CRM-TAL-S180052056

Europe Declaration of Conformity in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH
Product type designation: S180052056
Intended use: Tire pressure monitoring system
The product mentioned above complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC, when used for its intended purpose:
Health and safety pursuant to Art. 3(1)(a):
Applied standard(s):
EN 609501:2006 + A11:2009 + A1:2010 + A12:2011
EN 62479:2010
Electromagnetic compatibility pursuant to Art. 3(1)(b):
Applied standard(s):
EN 301 4891 V1.8.1 (200804)
EN 301 4893 V1.4.1 (200208)
Efficient use of spectrum pursuant to Art. 3(2):
Applied standard(s):
EN 300 2201 V2.3.1 (201002)
EN 300 2202 V2.3.1 (201002)
The following marking applies to the above mentioned product:

Hrvatski Ovim, Continental Automotive GmbH, izjavljuje da ovaj tip TPMS zadovoljava bitne zahtjeve i ostale vazece odrednice, a sukladno Smjernici 1999/5/EC.
Cestina Continental Automotive GmbH tímto prohla- suje, ze tento TPMS je ve shod se základními pozadavky a dalsími príslusnými ustanoveními smernice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Undertegnede Continental Automotive GmbH erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr TPMS over- holder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Continental Automotive GmbH, dass sich das Gerät TPMS in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Continental Automotive GmbH seadme TPMS vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiiv- ist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English Hereby, Continental Automotive GmbH, de- clares that this TPMS is in compliance with the

234

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

License Texts and Certifications

REFERENCE

essential requirements and other rele-vant pro- met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante

visions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Español Por medio de la presente Continental Automo- tive GmbH declara que el TPMS cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cuales-quiera otras dis- posiciones aplicables o exigi-bles de la Direc- tiva 1999/5/CE.
Continental Automotive GmbH TPMS 1999/5/.
Français Par la présente Continental Automotive GmbH déclare que l'appareil TPMS est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres disposi- tions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italiano Con la presente Continental Automotive GmbH dichiara che questo TPMS è conforme ai requi- siti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni perti- nenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviesu Ar so Continental Automotive GmbH deklar, ka TPMS atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiska- jm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem notei- kumiem.
Lietuvi Siuo Continental Automotive GmbH deklaruoja, kad sis TPMS atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Continental Automotive GmbH dat het toestel TPMS in overeen-stemming is

Malti Hawnhekk, Continental Automotive GmbH, jid- dikjara li dan TPMS jikkonforma mal-tigijiet es- senzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid- Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Magyar Alulírott, Continental Automotive GmbH nyilat- kozom, hogy a TPMS megfelel a vonatkozó alapvet követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elírásainak.
Polski Niniejszym Continental Automotive GmbH o- wiadcza, e TPMS jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi post- anowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português Continental Automotive GmbH declara que este TPMS está conforme com os requisitos es- senciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko Continental Automotive GmbH izjavlja, da je ta TPMS v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in osta- limi relevantnimi dolocili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky Continental Automotive GmbH týmto vyhlasuje, ze TPMS spa základné poziadavky a vsetky príslusné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi Continental Automotive GmbH vakuuttaa täten että TPMS tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä kos- kevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

235

REFERENCE

License Texts and Certifications

Svenska Härmed intygar Continental Automotive GmbH att denna TPMS står I överens-stämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga rele- vanta bestämmelser som fram-går av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Continental Automotive GmbH yfir því að TPMS er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Norsk Continental Automotive GmbH erklærer herved at utstyret TPMS er i samsvar med de grunnleg- gende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Israel A. The use of this product does not need a wireless operation license. B. The product does not include an RF disturb- ance protection, and should not disturb other licensed products. C. It is forbidden to replace the antenna or to make any change in this product.
Australia/New Zealand
Russia C-DE-ML05.H01232

South Africa
China In accordance with the provisions on the Radio Regulations of the people's Republic of China, the radio transmission equipment, after exami- nation, conforms to the provisions with its CMIIT ID: 2013DJ7376
Information regarding Open Source Software Li- censes
The "IwIP A Lightweight TCP/IP stack" in- cluded in some products is licensed under the "BSD licence". A copy of that license in the Eng- lish original version with a copyright notice, a disclaimer of warranty, and an exclusion of lia- bility is included below. Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Sci- ence. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following dis- claimer in the documentation and/or other ma- terials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of the author may not be used to en- dorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permis- sion. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AU-

236

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

License Texts and Certifications
THOR ``AS IS`` AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT- ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR- POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDI- RECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI- TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIA- BILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

237

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys- tem 94
ACC, Active Cruise Control 98 Acceleration Assistant, refer to
Launch Control 58 Activated-charcoal filter 117 Active Cruise Control, ACC 98 Additives, oil 193 Adjustments, seats/head re-
straints 35 Adjustments, steering
wheel 42 After washing vehicle 217 Airbags 78 Airbags, indicator/warning
light 79 Air circulation, refer to Recir-
culated-air mode 113, 117 Air conditioner 112 Air, dehumidifying, refer to
Cooling function 113, 116 Air distribution,
manual 113, 116 Air flow, air conditioner 113 Air flow, automatic climate
control 116 Air pressure, tires 176 Air vents, refer to Ventila-
tion 118 Alarm system 30 Alarm triggering 30 Alarm, unintentional 31 All around the center con-
sole 16 All around the roofliner 17 All around the steering
wheel 14 All-season tires, refer to Win-
ter tires 184

Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 120
Alternative oil types 194 Antifreeze, washer fluid 54 Antilock Brake System,
ABS 94 Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 94 Apple iPod/iPhone 155 Approved axle load 223 Approved engine oils, see
Suitable engine oil types 194 Ash tray 123 Assistance when driving off 97 Assist system, refer to Intelli- gent Safety 86 AUTO intensity 116 Automatic car wash 216 Automatic climate con- trol 115 Automatic Curb Monitor 41 Automatic deactivation, frontseat passenger airbags 80 Automatic headlight con- trol 74 Automatic locking 29 Automatic recirculated-air control 117 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 55 AUTO program, automatic cli- mate control 116 AUTO program, intensity 116 Auto Start/Stop function 49 AUX-IN port 154 Average fuel consumption 68 Average speed 68 Axle loads, weights 223

B
Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 36
Balance 148 Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 211 Bar for tow-starting/
towing 214 Bass 148 Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 209 Battery, vehicle 209 Belts, safety belts 37 Beverage holder, cu-
pholder 128 Bluetooth, refer to Hands-free
system 162 Bonus range, GREEN
mode 143 Bottle holder, refer to Cu-
pholder 128 Brake assistant 94 Brake discs, break-in 134 Brake pads, break-in 134 Braking, hints 135 Breakdown assistance 211 Break-in 134 Bug light 201 Bulb replacement 200 Bulb replacement, front 201 Bulb replacement, rear 203 Bulb replacement, side 206 Bulbs and lights 200 Button, RES 100 Button, Start/Stop 47 Bypassing, refer to Jump-
starting 211

238

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

C
California Proposition 65 Warning 7
Camera-based cruise control, ACC 98
Camera lenses, care 219 Can holder, refer to Cu-
pholder 128 Car battery 209 Car care products 217 Care, displays 219 Care, vehicle 217 Cargo area 124 Cargo area, adapting size 129 Cargo area, enlarging 125 Cargo area lid 27 Cargo area, storage compart-
ments 129 Cargo cover 124 Cargo, securing 138 Cargo straps, securing
cargo 138 Car key, refer to Remote con-
trol 22 Carpet, care 219 Car wash 216 Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 135 CBS Condition Based Serv-
ice 197 Center armrest 128 Center console 16 Central instrument cluster,
LED ring 70 Central locking system 26 Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7 Changing parts 199 Changing the station 150 Changing wheels 206 Changing wheels/tires 183 Chassis number, see vehicle
identification number 9 Check Control 60

Checking the oil level elec- tronically 192
Children, seating position 43 Children, transporting
safely 43 Child restraint fixing sys-
tem 43 Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 44 Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 43 Child safety locks 46 Child seat, mounting 43 Child seats 43 Chrome parts, care 218 Chrono package, cockpit 70 Cigarette lighter 123 Cleaning, displays 219 Climate control 112, 115 Clock 64 Closing/opening via door
lock 26 Closing/opening with remote
control 24 Clothes hooks 129 Coasting 144 Coasting with engine decou-
pled, coasting 144 Coasting with idling en-
gine 144 Combination reel, refer to
Turn signals 52 Combination reel, refer to
Wiper system 52 Comfort Access 27 Compartments in the
doors 128 Compass 121 Compressor 185 Computer, refer to On-board
computer 67 Condensation on win-
dows 117 Condensation under the vehi-
cle 136

Condition Based Service CBS 197
Confirmation signal 29 Control systems, driving stabil-
ity 94 Convenient opening 24 Coolant 195 Cooling function 113, 116 Cooling, maximum 116 Cooling system 195 Cornering lamp 75 Corrosion on brake discs 136 Cosmetic mirror 123 Courtesy lamps during unlock-
ing 24 Courtesy lamps with the vehi-
cle locked 25 Cruise control 104 Cruise control, active 98 Cruising range 64 Cupholder 128 Current fuel consumption 65
D
Damage, tires 182 Damping control, dynamic 95 Data, technical 222 Date 64 Date, radio 69 Date, setting on radio 69 Daytime running lights 74 Defrosting, refer to defrosting
the windows 113 Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 117 Defrosting the windows 113 Dehumidifying, air 113, 116 Digital clock 64 Digital compass 121 Digital radio 151 Dimensions 222 Dimmable exterior mirrors 41 Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 42

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

239

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 52
Display, electronic, instrument cluster 60
Display, engine tempera- ture 68
Display lighting, refer to In- strument lighting 76
Displays 59 Displays, cleaning 219 Disposal, coolant 196 Disposal, vehicle battery 210 Distance control, refer to
PDC 106 Distance covered, setting
units 69 Door lock, refer to Remote
control 22 Drive mode, GREEN
mode 142 Drive-off assistant 97 Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 94 Driving Dynamics Control 96 Driving instruction, GREEN
mode 144 Driving instructions, break-
in 134 Driving mode 96 Driving notes, general 134 Driving stability control sys-
tems 94 Driving tips 134 DSC Dynamic Stability Con-
trol 94 DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
trol 95 Dynamic Damping Control 95 Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 94 Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 95

E
Electronic displays, instrument cluster 60
Electronic oil measure- ment 192
Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 94
Emergency detection, remote control 23
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 172
Emergency start function, en- gine start 23
Emergency wheel, compact wheel, refer to Emergency wheel 207
Energy Control 65 Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 49 Engine, automatic switch-
off 49 Engine compartment 190 Engine compartment, working
in 190 Engine coolant 195 Engine idling when driving,
coasting 144 Engine oil 192 Engine oil, adding 193 Engine oil additives 193 Engine oil change 194 Engine oil filler neck 193 Engine oil types, alterna-
tive 194 Engine oil types, ap-
proved 194 Engine start during malfunc-
tion 23 Engine start, jump-start-
ing 211 Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 48 Engine stop 48 Engine temperature, dis-
play 68

Entering a car wash 216 Equipment, interior 119 Error displays, see Check Con-
trol 60 ESP Electronic Stability Pro-
gram, refer to DSC 94 Exchanging wheels/tires 183 Exhaust system 135 Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 41 Exterior mirrors 40 External start 211 External temperature dis-
play 64 External temperature warn-
ing 64 Eyes for securing cargo 138
F
Fader 148 Failure message, see Check
Control 60 False alarm, refer to Uninten-
tional alarm 31 Fan, refer to Air flow 113, 116 Filler neck for engine oil 193 Fine wood, care 218 First aid kit 211 Fitting for towing, see tow fit-
ting 214 Flat tire, changing wheels 206 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84 Flat tire, repairing 185 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 81 Flat tire, warning lamp 82, 85 Flooding 135 Floor carpet, care 219 Floor mats, care 219 Fogged up windows 113 Folding back rear seat back-
rests 125 Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 54 Foot brake 135

240

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Formats, setting 69 Front airbags 78 Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func- tion 87 Front fog lights 76 front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 80 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator lamp 80 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 84 Fuel 174 Fuel consumption, current 65 Fuel consumption, refer to Average fuel consump- tion 68 Fuel filler flap 172 Fuel gauge 64 Fuel lid 172 Fuel quality 174 Fuel recommendation 174 Fuel, tank capacity 226 Fuse 210
G
Garage door opener, refer to Universal Integrated Remote Control 119
Gasoline 174 Gear change, Steptronic trans-
mission 56 Gear shift indicator 65 General driving notes 134 Glare shield 123 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor-
amic glass sunroof 32 Glove compartment 127 Gong, volume equaliza-
tion 148 GREEN mode 142 GREEN mode, bonus
range 143 GREEN mode indicator 142 GREEN - program, driving dy-
namics 96

GREEN tip 144 Gross vehicle weight, ap-
proved 223 Ground clearance 136
H
Halogen headlights 201 Handbrake, refer to parking
brake 51 Hand-held transmitter, alter-
nating code 120 Hands-free system 162 Hazard warning flashers 211 HD Radio 151 Head airbags 78 Headlight control, auto-
matic 74 Headlight courtesy delay fea-
ture 74 Headlight flasher 52 Headlight glass 200 Headlights, care 217 Head restraints 35 Head restraints, front 38 Head restraints, rear 39 Heavy cargo, stowing 138 High-beam Assistant 75 High beams 52 High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 75 Hills 136 Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 97 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 128 Homepage 6 Hood 190 Horn 14 Hot exhaust system 135 Hydroplaning 135
I
Ice warning, see External tem- perature warning 64

Icy roads, see External tem- perature warning 64
Identification marks, tires 180 Identification number, see ve-
hicle identification number 9 Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 22 Ignition off 47 Ignition on 47 Illuminated ring, central in-
strument cluster 70 Indication of a flat tire 82, 85 Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 60 Individual air distribu-
tion 113, 116 Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 23 Inflation pressure, tires 176 Inflation pressure warning,
tires 84 Info display, refer to On-Board
computer 67 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni-
tor TPM 82 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 85 Instrument cluster 59 Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 60 Instrument lighting 76 Integrated key 22 Intelligent Safety 86 Intensity, AUTO program 116 Interior equipment 119 Interior lights 76 Interior lights during unlock-
ing 24 Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 25 Interior motion sensor 31 Interior rearview mirror, auto-
matic dimming feature 42 Interior rearview mirror, com-
pass 121

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

241

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Interior rearview mirror, man- ually dimmable 41
Internet site 6 Interval display, service re-
quirements 65 Interval mode 53
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 207
Joystick, Steptronic transmis- sion 56
Jump-starting 211
K
Key/remote control 22 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 27 Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 23 Kickdown, Steptronic trans-
mission 56 Knee airbag 79
L
Lamp replacement 200 Lamp replacement, front 201 Lamp replacement, rear 203 Lamp replacement, side 206 Language, setting 69 Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 138 LATCH child restraint sys-
tem 44 Launch Control 58 Leather, care 217 LED bug light 201 LED headlights 201 LED ring, central instrument
cluster 70 LEDs, light-emitting di-
odes 200

License Texts and Certifica- tions 231
Light 73 Light-alloy wheels, care 218 Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 200 Lighter 123 Lighting 73 Lights and bulbs 200 Light switch 73 Load 138 Loading 137 Lock, door 26 Locking/unlocking via door
lock 26 Locking/unlocking with re-
mote control 24 Locking, automatic 29 Locking, settings 29 Lock, power window 32 Locks, doors, and windows 46 Low beams 73 Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 75 Lower back support, mechani-
cal 36 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 138 Lumbar support, mechani-
cal 36
M
Maintenance 197 Maintenance require-
ments 197 Maintenance, service require-
ments 65 Maintenance system,
MINI 197 Make-up mirror 123 Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 60 Manual air distribu-
tion 113, 116 Manual air flow 113, 116

Manual mode, transmis- sion 56
Manual operation, door lock 26
Manual operation, exterior mirrors 41
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 172
Manual operation, Park Dis- tance Control PDC 107
Manual transmission 55 Manufacturer of the MINI 7 Marking on approved
tires 183 Marking, run-flat tires 184 Master key, refer to Remote
control 22 Maximum cooling 116 Maximum speed, display 66 Maximum speed, winter
tires 184 Medical kit 211 Menu in instrument cluster 67 Messages, see Check Con-
trol 60 Microfilter 114, 117 MID - program, driving dy-
namics 96 MINI maintenance sys-
tem 197 Minimum tread, tires 182 Mirrors 40 Mobile communication devi-
ces in the vehicle 135 Mobile phone 162 Mobility System 185 Mode, GREEN Mode 142 Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 200 Mounting of child restraint
systems 43 Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14

242

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

N
Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 38
Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 39
New wheels and tires 183 Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 214
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos- tics 198
Octane rating, refer to Recom- mended fuel grade 174
Odometer 64 Oil 192 Oil, adding 193 Oil additives 193 Oil change 194 Oil change interval, service re-
quirements 65 Oil filler neck 193 Oil types, alternative 194 Oil types, approved 194 Old batteries, disposal 210 On-board computer 67 Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 198 Onboard vehicle tool kit 199 Opening/closing via door
lock 26 Opening/closing with remote
control 24 Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 117 Own safety 7
P
Paint, vehicle 217 Panoramic glass sunroof 32 Parallel parking assistant 108

Park Distance Control PDC 106
Parked vehicle, condensa- tion 136
Parking aid, refer to PDC 106 Parking assistant 108 Parking brake 51 Parking lights 73 Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 41 PDC Park Distance Con-
trol 106 Pedestrian warning with city
braking function 90 Performance Control 95 Personal Profile 23 Phone 162 Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 33 Pinch protection system, win-
dows 32 Plastic, care 218 Power failure 209 Power windows 31 Pressure, tire air pressure 176 Pressure warning, tires 84 Profile, refer to Personal Pro-
file 23 Protective function, glass sun-
roof 33 Protective function, win-
dows 32
R
Radiator fluid 195 Radio, AM/FM stations 149 Radio, Apple iPod/iPhone 155 Radio, AUX-IN port 154 Radio, control ele-
ments 149, 154 Radio, external devices 154 Radio, FM/AM 149 Radio, muting 149 Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 22

Radio, overview 149, 154 Radio ready state 47 Radio, satellite radio 152 Radio, save stations 151 Radio, USB audio inter-
face 155 Rain sensor 53 Rear fog lights 76 Rear lights 203 Rear luggage rack 139 Rearview mirror 40 Rear window de-
froster 114, 117 Recirculated-air filter 117 Recirculated-air
mode 113, 117 Recommended fuel
grade 174 Recommended tire
brands 183 Refueling 172 Remaining range 64 Remote control/key 22 Remote control, blocking 23 Remote control, malfunc-
tion 25 Remote control, replacing the
battery 22 Remote control, univer-
sal 119 Replacement fuse 210 Replacing parts 199 Replacing the battery, remote
control 22 Replacing wheels/tires 183 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 100 Reserve warning, refer to
Range 64 Resetting the tone set-
tings 148 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 82 Retaining straps, securing
cargo 138 Retreaded tires 183

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

243

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Roadside parking lights 73 RON recommended fuel
grade 174 Roofliner 17 Roof load capacity 223 Roof-mounted luggage
rack 138 Rope for tow-starting/
towing 214 RSC Run Flat System Compo-
nent, refer to Run-flat tires 184 Rubber components, care 218 Run-flat tires 184
S
Safe braking 135 Safety belt reminder for driv-
er's seat and front passenger seat 38 Safety belts 37 Safety belts, care 218 Safety reel, windows 32 Safety systems, airbags 78 Satellite radio 152 Saving fuel 141 Screwdriver 199 Screw thread for tow fit- ting 215 Sealant 185 Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 37 Seat heating, front 37 Seating position for chil- dren 43 Seats 35 Select a station 150 Selecting a station man- ually 150 Selection list in instrument cluster 67 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 56 Sensors, care 219

Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi-
tion Based Service CBS 197 Service requirements, dis-
play 65 Settings and information 69 Settings, locking/unlocking 29 Settings, mirrors 40 Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 57 Side airbags 78 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 29 Sitting safely 35 Size 222 Slide/tilt glass roof 32 Snow chains 188 Socket 123 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag-
nostics 198 Sound settings 148, 149 Spare fuse 210 Spare tire, refer to Emergency
wheel 207 Specified engine oil types 194 Speed, average 68 Speed limit detection, com-
puter 69 Speed limiter, display 66 Speed Limit Information 66 Speed warning 69 Sport instruments, cockpit 70 SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 96 Sport program, transmis-
sion 56 Stability control systems 94 Start/stop, automatic func-
tion 49 Start/Stop button 47 Start function during malfunc-
tion 23 Starting the engine 48 Station, storing 150 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering wheel, adjusting 42

Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic transmis- sion 55
Steptronic transmission 55 Stopping the engine 48 Storage compartments 127 Storage, tires 184 Storing the vehicle 219 Suitable engine oils 194 Summer tires, tread 182 Sun visor 123 Supplementary text mes-
sages 63 Switch for Dynamic Driving 96 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 64 Tailgate 27 Tailgate via remote control 25 Tail lights 203 Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7 Technical data 222 Temperature, air condi-
tioner 113 Temperature, automatic cli-
mate control 115 Temperature display for exter-
nal temperature 64 Temperature display, setting
units 69 Temperature, engine 68 Tempomat, see Camera-
based cruise control 98 Terminal, starting aid 212 Text messages, supplemen-
tary 63 Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 30 Thigh support 36 Tilt alarm sensor 30 Time, radio, setting time on
the radio 69

244

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Tire damage 182 Tire identification marks 180 Tire inflation pressure 176 Tire inflation pressure moni-
tor, refer to FTM 84 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81 Tires, changing 183 Tire sealant 185 Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 176 Tires, run-flat tires 184 Tire tread 182 Tools 199 Total vehicle weight 223 Tow fitting 214 Towing 213 Tow-starting 213 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 81 Traction control 95 TRACTION drive mode, driving
dynamics 95 Transmission lock, releasing
manually 57 Transmission, manual trans-
mission 55 Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 55 Transporting children
safely 43 Tread, tires 182 Treble 148 Triple turn signal activa-
tion 52 Trip odometer 64 Turn signal, front 201 Turn signal, side 206 Turn signals, operation 52 Turn signals, rear, bulb re-
placement 203
U
Unintentional alarm 31 Units 69 Units, setting 69 Universal remote control 119

Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 56
Unlocking/locking via door lock 26
Unlocking/locking with re- mote control 24
Unlocking, settings 29 Updates made after the edito-
rial deadline 6 Upholstery care 218 USB audio interface 155 USB interface 124
V
Vanity mirror 123 Vehicle battery 209 Vehicle battery, replacing 209 Vehicle, break-in 134 Vehicle care 217 Vehicle features and op-
tions 6 Vehicle identification num-
ber 9 Vehicle jack 207 Vehicle paint 217 Vehicle storage 219 Vehicle wash 216 Ventilation 118 VIN, see vehicle identification
number 9
W
Warning and indicator lamps, see Check Control 60
Warning displays, see Check Control 60
Warning messages, see Check Control 60
Warning triangle 211 Warranty 7 Washer fluid 54 Washer nozzles, wind-
shield 54 Washer system 52

Washing, vehicle 216 Water on roads 135 Weights 223 Welcome lamps during un-
locking 24 Welcome lights 74 Wheels, changing 183 Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 176 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 84 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 81 Window defroster,
rear 114, 117 Windows, powered 31 Windshield de-
froster 114, 117 Windshield washer fluid 54 Windshield washer nozzles 54 Windshield washer system 52 Windshield wiper 52 Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 54 Winter storage, care 219 Winter tires, suitable tires 184 Winter tires, tread 182 Wiper blades, replacing 199 Wiper fluid 54 Wiper system 52 Wood, care 218 Wrench 199

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

245

01 40 2 961 140 ue

*BL296114000N*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 140 - II/15

Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows) AH XSL Formatter V6.0 MR3a for Windows : 6.0.4.6312 (2012/07/18 11:00JST)